[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2004000883A1 - Regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor - Google Patents

Regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004000883A1
WO2004000883A1 PCT/EP2003/006610 EP0306610W WO2004000883A1 WO 2004000883 A1 WO2004000883 A1 WO 2004000883A1 EP 0306610 W EP0306610 W EP 0306610W WO 2004000883 A1 WO2004000883 A1 WO 2004000883A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
growth hormone
releasing hormone
hormone receptor
gpcr
polynucleotide
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2003/006610
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Alex Smolyar
Original Assignee
Bayer Healthcare Ag
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Bayer Healthcare Ag filed Critical Bayer Healthcare Ag
Priority to AU2003238032A priority Critical patent/AU2003238032A1/en
Publication of WO2004000883A1 publication Critical patent/WO2004000883A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • C07K14/72Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants for hormones
    • C07K14/723G protein coupled receptor, e.g. TSHR-thyrotropin-receptor, LH/hCG receptor, FSH receptor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/74Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving hormones or other non-cytokine intercellular protein regulatory factors such as growth factors, including receptors to hormones and growth factors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K48/00Medicinal preparations containing genetic material which is inserted into cells of the living body to treat genetic diseases; Gene therapy
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/435Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from animals; from humans
    • G01N2333/705Assays involving receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • G01N2333/72Assays involving receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants for hormones
    • G01N2333/726G protein coupled receptor, e.g. TSHR-thyrotropin-receptor, LH/hCG receptor, FSH
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2500/00Screening for compounds of potential therapeutic value

Definitions

  • the invention relates to the regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
  • GPCR G protein-coupled receptors
  • GPCRs include receptors for such diverse agents as calcitonin, adrenergic hormones, endothelin, cAMP, adenosine, acetylcholine, serotonin, dopamine, histamine, thrombin, kinin, follicle stimulating hormone, opsins, endothelial differentiation gene-1, rhodopsins, odorants, cytomegalovirus, G proteins themselves, effector proteins such as phospholipase C, adenyl cyclase, and phosphodiesterase, and actuator proteins such as protein kinase A and protein kinase C.
  • the GPCR protein superfamily now contains over 250 types of paralogues, receptors that represent variants generated by gene duplications (or other processes), as opposed to orthologues, the same receptor from different species.
  • the superfamily can be broken down into five families: Family I, receptors typified by rhodopsin and the ⁇ 2-adrenergic receptor and currently represented by over 200 unique members
  • Family II the recently characterized parathyroid hormone/calcitonin/- secretin receptor family (Juppner et al., Science 254, 1024-26, 1991; Lin et al., Science 254, 1022-24, 1991); Family III, the metabotropic glutamate receptor family in mammals (Nakanishi, Science 258, 597-603, 1992); Family TV, the cAMP receptor family, important in the chemotaxis and development of D. discoideum
  • GPCRs possess seven conserved membrane-spanning domains connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. GPCRs (also known as 7TM receptors) have been characterized as including these seven conserved hydrophobic stretches of about 20 to 30 amino acids, connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. Most GPCRs have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops, which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure. The seven transmembrane regions are designated as TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4, TM5, TM6, and TM7. TM3 has been implicated in signal transduction.
  • Phosphorylation and lipidation (palmitylation or farnesylation) of cysteine residues can influence signal transduction of some GPCRs.
  • Most GPCRs contain potential phosphorylation sites within the third cytoplasmic loop and/or the carboxy terminus.
  • phosphorylation by protein kinase A and/or specific receptor kinases mediates receptor desensitization.
  • the ligand binding sites of GPCRs are believed to comprise hydrophilic sockets formed by several GPCR transmembrane domains.
  • the hydrophilic sockets are surrounded by hydrophobic residues of the GPCRs.
  • the hydrophilic side of each GPCR transmembrane helix is postulated to face inward and form a polar ligand binding site.
  • TM3 has been implicated in several GPCRs as having a ligand binding site, such as the TM3 aspartate residue.
  • TM5 serines, a TM6 asparagine, and TM6 or TM7 phenylalanines or tyrosines also are implicated in ligand binding.
  • GPCRs are coupled inside the cell by heterotrimeric G proteins to various intracellular enzymes, ion channels, and transporters (see Johnson et al, Endoc. Rev. 10, 317-31, 1989).
  • Different G protein alpha subunits preferentially stimulate particular effectors to modulate various biological functions in a cell.
  • Phospho- rylation of cytoplasmic residues of GPCRs is an important mechanism for the regulation of some GPCRs.
  • the effect of hormone binding is the activation inside the cell of the enzyme, adenylate cyclase.
  • Enzyme activation by hormones is dependent on the presence of the nucleotide GTP. GTP also influences hormone binding.
  • a G protein connects the hormone receptor to adenylate cyclase. G protein exchanges GTP for bound GDP when activated by a hormone receptor. The GTP-carrying form then binds to activated adenylate cyclase. Hydrolysis of GTP to GDP, catalyzed by the G protein itself, returns the G protein to its basal, inactive form.
  • the G protein serves a dual role, as an intermediate that relays the signal from receptor to effector, and as a clock that controls the duration of the signal.
  • GHRH Growth hormone-releasing hormone
  • GHRH is an extracellular signal that exerts its effect on cells through a G-protein transmembrane signaling pathway.
  • GHRH can bind to GHRH cell surface receptors and thereby activate G-proteins which, in turn, stimulate adenylate cyclase to produce cyclic AMP (cAMP) from ATP.
  • Cyclic AMP influences many cellular processes, typically by stimulating the activity of protein kinases that transfer terminal phosphate groups from ATP to specific amino acids on target proteins. Phosphorylation typically alters the activity of these proteins, either raising or lowering the activity.
  • Fig. 1 shows the BLASTP - alignment of 866 against swissnew
  • Scoring matrix BLOSUM62 (used to infer consensus pattern) Database searched : nrdb_l_
  • Fig. 2 to 6 show the relative mRNA expression of the GHRH receptor in various human tissues.
  • the invention relates to an isolated polynucleotide from the group consisting of:
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • e a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d) and encodes a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide.
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
  • a DNA sequence harboring the coding sequence (ORF) for human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is shown in SEQ ID NO: 1. This sequence is located on chromosome 7, map 7 l4.3.
  • the ORF is shown in SEQ ID NO: 3.
  • a homologues sequence Q02643, a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GHRH receptor), which lacks a 10 amino acid stretch of the novel receptor of the invention is shown in SEQ ID NO: 4.
  • a 7 transmembrane receptor (7tm_2) region and a hormone receptor domain region are identified.
  • This extracellular hormone domain contains four conserved cysteines (shown in bold in FIG. 1) that probably form disulphide bridges. This domain is found in a variety of hormone receptors. It may be a ligand binding domain. Seven transmembrane helices are underlined, and prosite conservative regions are shown in italics. A ten amino acid insertion is located in the first extracellular loop between helices two and three and most likely is involved in ligand binding.
  • Related human ESTs are shown in SEQ ID NOs:5 and 6.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor of the invention is expected to be useful for the same purposes as previously identified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptors. Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is believed to be useful in therapeutic methods to treat disorders such as cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal and liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders and urologic disorders. Human growth hormone-
  • releasing hormone receptor also can be used to screen for human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor activators and inhibitors.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is an expression vector containing any polynucleotide of the present invention.
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a host cell containing any expression vector of the present invention.
  • Still another embodiment of the present invention is a substantially purified Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by any poly- nucleotide of the present invention.
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method for detecting a polynucleotide encoding a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide in a biological sample comprising the following steps: a. hybridizing any polynucleotide of the present invention to a nucleic acid material of a biological sample, thereby forming a hybridization complex; and b. detecting said hybridization complex.
  • Still another embodiment of the present invention is a method for detecting a polynucleotide of the present invention or a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide of the present invention comprising the steps of: a. contacting a biological sample with a reagent which specifically interacts with the polynucleotide or the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide and b. detecting the interaction
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a diagnostic kit for conducting any method of the present invention.
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • Still another embodiment of the present invention is a method of screening for agents which regulate the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the steps of: a. contacting a test compound with a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of the present invention; and b.
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the step of: contacting a test compound with any polynucleotide of the present invention and detecting binding of the test compound to the polynucleotide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR).
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of reducing the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the step of: contacting a cell with a reagent which specifically binds to any poly- nucleotide of the present invention or any Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide of the present invention, whereby the activity of Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) is reduced.
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • Still another embodiment of the present invention is a reagent that modulates the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide or a polynucleotide wherein said reagent is identified by any methods of the present invention.
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • Even another embodiment of the present invention is a pharmaceutical composition, comprising: an expression vector of the present invention or a reagent of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention is the use of an expression vector of the present invention or a reagent of the present invention for modulating the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) in a disease, preferably cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal or liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders or urologic disorders.
  • GPCR Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
  • the invention thus provides a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor that can be used to identify test compounds that may act, for example, as activators or inhibitors.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor and fragments thereof also are useful in raising specific antibodies that can block the protein and effectively reduce its activity.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides comprise at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 400, 425, or 434 contiguous amino acids selected from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or a biologically active variant thereof, as defined below.
  • a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide of the invention therefore can be a portion of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor, a full-length growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor, or a fusion protein comprising all or a portion of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
  • Biologically active variants are examples of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor, a full-length growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor, or a fusion protein comprising all or a portion of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide variants which are biologically active, e.g., retain a functional activity, also are human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides.
  • naturally or non- naturally occurring human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide variants have amino acid sequences which are at least about 98, or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 2 or a fragment thereof. Percent identity between a putative human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide variant and an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2 is determined by conventional methods. See, for example, Altschul et al., Bull. Math. Bio. 48:603 (1986), and Henikoff & Henikoff, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA SP:10915 (1992). Briefly, two amino acid sequences are aligned to optimize the alignment scores using a gap opening penalty of 10, a gap extension penalty of 1, and the "BLOSUM62" scoring matrix of Henikoff & Henikoff, 1992.
  • the "FASTA" similarity search algorithm of Pearson & Lipman is a suitable protein alignment method for examining the level of identity shared by an amino acid sequence disclosed herein and the amino acid sequence of a putative variant.
  • the FASTA algorithm is described by Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 55:2444(1988), and by Pearson, Meth. Enzymol. 183:63 (1990).
  • the ten regions with the highest density of identities are then rescored by comparing the similarity of all paired amino acids using an amino acid substitution matrix, and the ends of the regions are "trimmed" to include only those residues that contribute to the highest score. If there are several regions with scores greater than the "cutoff value (calculated by a predetermined formula based upon the length of the sequence the ktup value), then - l i ⁇
  • the trimmed initial regions are examined to determine whether the regions can be joined to form an approximate alignment with gaps.
  • the highest scoring regions of the two amino acid sequences are aligned using a modification of the Needleman-Wunsch- Sellers algorithm (Needleman & Wunsch, J Mol. Biol.48: AAA (1970); Sellers, SIAM J. Appl. Math.26:7S7 (1974)), which allows for amino acid insertions and deletions.
  • FASTA can also be used to determine the sequence identity of nucleic acid molecules using a ratio as disclosed above.
  • the ktup value can range between one to six, preferably from three to six, most preferably three, with other parameters set as default.
  • Variations in percent identity can be due, for example, to amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions.
  • Amino acid substitutions are defined as one for one amino acid replacements. They are conservative in nature when the substituted amino acid has similar structural and/or chemical properties. Examples of conservative replacements are substitution of a leucine with an isoleucine or valine, an aspartate with a glutamate, or a threonine with a serine.
  • Amino acid insertions or deletions are changes to or within an amino acid sequence. They typically fall in the range of about 1 to 5 amino acids. Guidance in determining which amino acid residues can be substituted, inserted, or deleted without abolishing biological or immunological activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be found using computer programs well known in the art, such as DNASTAR software.
  • the invention additionally, encompasses growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides that are differentially modified during or after translation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications can be carried out by known techniques including, but not limited, to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH 4 , acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction, metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin, etc.
  • Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the invention include, for example, e.g., N-linked or O- linked carbohydrate chains, processing of N- terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemical moieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of an N-terminal methionine residue as a result of prokaryotic host cell expression.
  • the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides may also be modified with a detectable label, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein.
  • the invention also provides chemically modified derivatives of growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides that may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogenicity (see U.S. Patent No. 4,179,337).
  • the chemical moieties for derivitization can be selected from water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, and the like.
  • the polypeptides can be modified at random or predetermined positions within the molecule and can include one, two, three, or more attached chemical moieties.
  • Fusion proteins are useful for generating antibodies against growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide amino acid sequences and for use in various assay systems. For example, fusion proteins can be used to identify proteins that interact with portions of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. Protein affinity chromatography or library-based assays for protein- protein interactions, such as the yeast two-hybrid or phage display systems, can be used for this purpose. Such methods are well known in the art and also can be used as drug screens.
  • a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide fusion protein comprises two polypeptide segments fused together by means of a peptide bond.
  • the first polypeptide segment comprises a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, such as those described above.
  • the first polypeptide segment also can comprise full-length growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
  • the second polypeptide segment can be a full-length protein or a protein fragment.
  • Proteins commonly used in fusion protein construction include ⁇ -galactosidase, ⁇ - glucuronidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP), autofluorescent proteins, including blue fluorescent protein (BFP), glutathione-S-transferase (GST), luciferase, horseradish peroxidase (HRP), and chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT).
  • epitope tags are used in fusion protein constructions, including histidine (His) tags, FLAG tags, influenza hemagglutinin (HA) tags, Myc tags, VSV-G tags, and thioredoxin (Trx) tags.
  • fusion constructions can include maltose binding protein (MBP), S-tag, Lex a DNA binding domain (DBD) fusions, GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions, and herpes simplex virus (HSV) BP16 protein fusions.
  • MBP maltose binding protein
  • DBD Lex a DNA binding domain
  • GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions
  • HSV herpes simplex virus
  • a fusion protein also can be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.
  • a fusion protein can be synthesized chemically, as is known in the art.
  • a fusion protein is produced by covalently linking two polypeptide segments or by standard procedures in the art of molecular biology.
  • Recombinant DNA methods can be used to prepare fusion proteins, for example, by making a DNA construct which comprises coding sequences selected from SEQ ID NO: 1 in proper reading frame with nucleotides encoding the second polypeptide segment and expressing the DNA construct in a host cell, as is known in the art.
  • Many kits for constructing fusion proteins are available from companies such as Promega Corporation (Madison, WI), Stratagene (La Jolla, CA), CLONTECH (Mountain View, CA), Santa Cruz Biotechnology (Santa Cruz, CA), MBL International Corporation (MIC;
  • Species homologs of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be obtained using growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide polynucleotides (described below) to make suitable probes or primers for screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast, identifying cDNAs which encode homologs of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, and expressing the cDNAs as is known in the art.
  • a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be single- or double-stranded and comprises a coding sequence or the complement of a coding sequence for a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • a coding sequence for human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is shown in SEQ ID NO: 3.
  • nucleotide sequences encoding human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides as well as homologous nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or their complements also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. Percent sequence identity between the sequences of two polynucleotides is determined using computer programs such as ALIGN which employ the FASTA algorithm, using an affine gap search with a gap open penalty of -12 and a gap extension penalty of -2.
  • cDNA Complementary DNA
  • species homologs, and variants of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides that encode biologically active growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides also are growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides.
  • Polynucleotide fragments comprising at least 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20, or 25 contiguous nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or their complements also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. These fragments can be used, for example, as hybridization probes or as antisense oligonucleotides.
  • Variants and homologs of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides described above also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides.
  • homologous growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide sequences can be identified by hybridization of candidate polynucleotides to known growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides under stringent conditions, as is known in the art.
  • Species homologs of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides disclosed herein also can be identified by making suitable probes or primers and screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast.
  • Human variants of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides can be identified, for example, by screening human cDNA expression libraries. It is well known that the T m of a double-stranded DNA decreases by 1-1.5°C with every 1% decrease in homology (Bonner et al, J. Mol.
  • Variants of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides or growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides of other species can therefore be identified by hybridizing a putative homologous growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide with a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or the complement thereof to form a test hybrid.
  • the melting temperature of the test hybrid is compared with the melting temperature of a hybrid comprising polynucleotides having perfectly complementary nucleotide sequences, and the number or percent of basepair mismatches within the test hybrid is calculated.
  • Nucleotide sequences which hybridize to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides or their complements following stringent hybridization and/or wash conditions also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides.
  • Stringent wash conditions are well known and understood in the art and are disclosed, for example, in Sambrook et al., MOLECULAR CLONING: A
  • T m of a hybrid between a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or the complement thereof and a polynucleotide sequence which is at least about 50, preferably about 75, 90, 96, or 98% identical to one of those nucleotide sequences can be calculated, for example, using the equation of Bolton and McCarthy, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
  • Stringent wash conditions include, for example, 4X SSC at 65°C, or 50% formamide, 4X SSC at 42°C, or 0.5X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65°C.
  • Highly stringent wash conditions include, for example, 0.2X SSC at 65°C.
  • a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be isolated free of other cellular components such as membrane components, proteins, and lipids.
  • Polynucleotides can be made by a cell and isolated using standard nucleic acid purification techniques, or synthesized using an amplification technique, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or by using an automatic synthesizer. Methods for isolating polynucleotides are routine and are known in the art. Any such technique for obtaining a polynucleotide can be used to obtain isolated growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. For example, restriction enzymes and probes can be used to isolate polynucleotide fragments, which comprise growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor nucleotide sequences. Isolated polynucleotides are in preparations that are free or at least 70, 80, or 90% free of other molecules.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor cDNA molecules can be made with standard molecular biology techniques, using growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor mRNA as a template. Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor cDNA molecules can thereafter be replicated using molecular biology techniques known in the art and disclosed in manuals such as Sambrook et al. (1989). An amplification technique, such as PCR, can be used to obtain additional copies of polynucleotides of the invention, using either human genomic DNA or cDNA as a template. Alternatively, synthetic chemistry techniques can be used to synthesize growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides.
  • the degeneracy of the genetic code allows alternate nucleotide sequences to be synthesized which will encode a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide having, for example, an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or a biologically active variant thereof.
  • PCR-based methods can be used to extend the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein to detect upstream sequences such as promoters and regulatory elements.
  • Sarkar PCR Methods Applic. 2, 318-322, 1993; Triglia et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 16, 8186, 1988; Lagerstrom et al, PCR Methods Applic. 1, 111-119, 1991; Parker et al, Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 3055-3060, 1991).
  • PCR, nested primers, and PROMOTERFINDER libraries (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif.) can be used to walk genomic DNA (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif). See WO 01/98340.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be obtained, for example, by purification from human cells, by expression of growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides, or by direct chemical synthesis.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be purified from any human cell which expresses the receptor, including host cells which have been transfected with growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides.
  • a purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is separated from other compounds that normally associate with the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide in the cell, such as certain proteins, carbohydrates, or lipids, using methods well-known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate fractionation, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, and preparative gel electrophoresis.
  • a preparation of purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides is at least 80% pure; preferably, the preparations are 90%, 95%, or 99% pure. Purity of the preparations can be assessed by any means known in the art, such as SDS- polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.
  • the polynucleotide can be inserted into an expression vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence.
  • Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described, for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) and in Ausubel et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, New York, N.Y., 1989.
  • a variety of expression vector/host systems can be utilized to contain and express sequences encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors, insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculo virus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids), or animal cell systems. See WO 01/98340.
  • Host cells such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors
  • yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculo virus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus
  • a host cell strain can be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide in the desired fashion.
  • modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation.
  • Post-translational processing which cleaves a "prepro" form of the polypeptide also can be used to facilitate correct insertion, folding and/or function.
  • CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38 Different host cells that have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for post-translational activities (e.g., CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38) are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC; 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, VA 20110-2209) and can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein. See WO 01/98340.
  • marker gene expression suggests that the growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if a sequence encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, transformed cells containing sequences which encode an growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a sequence encoding an growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide.
  • host cells which contain a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide and which express a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides encoding growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling, or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide.
  • sequences encoding a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe.
  • RNA probes are known in the art, are commercially available, and can be used to synthesize RNA probes in vitro by addition of labeled nucleotides and an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6. These procedures can be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Promega, and US Biochemical). Suitable reporter molecules or labels which can be used for ease of detection include radionuclides, enzymes, and fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents, as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like.
  • Host cells transformed with nucleotide sequences encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture.
  • the polypeptide produced by a transformed cell can be secreted or contained intra- cellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used.
  • expression vectors containing polynucleotides which encode growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of soluble growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane or which direct the membrane insertion of membrane-bound growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. See WO 01/98340.
  • Sequences encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see Caruthers et al, Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 215-223, 1980; Horn et al.
  • a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide itself can be produced using chemical methods to synthesize its amino acid sequence, such as by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154, 1963; Roberge et al, Science 269, 202-204, 1995). Protein synthesis can be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis can be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431 A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer).
  • fragments of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be separately synthesized and combined using chemical methods to produce a full-length molecule.
  • nucleotide sequences possessing non-naturally occurring codons.
  • codons preferred by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce an RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.
  • the nucleotide sequences disclosed herein can be engineered using methods generally known in the art to alter growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide-encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the polypeptide or mRNA product.
  • DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences.
  • site-directed mutagenesis can be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, introduce mutations, and so forth.
  • Antibody as used herein includes intact immunoglobulin molecules, as well as fragments thereof, such as Fab, F(ab') , and Fv, which are capable of binding an epitope of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • Fab fragment antigen binding protein
  • F(ab') fragment antigen binding protein
  • Fv fragment antigen binding protein
  • epitopes which involve non-contiguous amino acids may require more, e.g., at least 15, 25, or 50 amino acids.
  • An antibody which specifically binds to an epitope of a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be used therapeutically, as well as in immunochemical assays, such as Western blots, ELISAs, radioimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art.
  • immunochemical assays such as Western blots, ELISAs, radioimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art.
  • Various immunoassays can be used to identify antibodies having the desired specificity. Numerous protocols for competitive binding or immunoradiometric assays are well known in the art. Such immunoassays typically involve the measurement of complex formation between an immunogen and an antibody that specifically binds to the immunogen.
  • an antibody that specifically binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide provides a detection signal at least 5-, 10-, or 20-fold higher than a detection signal provided with other proteins when used in an immunochemical assay.
  • antibodies that specifically bind to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides do not detect other proteins in immunochemical assays and can immunoprecipitate a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide from solution. See WO 01/98340.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides are nucleotide sequences that are complementary to a specific DNA or RNA sequence. Once introduced into a cell, the complementary nucleotides combine with natural sequences produced by the cell to form complexes and block either transcription or translation. Preferably, an antisense oligonucleotide is at least 11 nucleotides in length, but can be at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides long. Longer sequences also can be used. Antisense oligonucleotide molecules can be provided in a DNA construct and introduced into a cell as described above to decrease the level of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene products in the cell.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides can be deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides, or a combination of both. Oligonucleotides can be synthesized manually or by an automated synthesizer, by covalently linking the 5' end of one nucleotide with the 3' end of another nucleotide with non-phosphodiester internucleotide linkages such alkylphosphonates, phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, alkylphosphonothioates, alkylphosphonates, phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, carbamates, acetamidate, carboxymethyl esters, carbonates, and phosphate triesters. See Brown, Meth. Mol. Biol. 20, 1-8, 1994; Sonveaux, Meth. Mol. Biol. 26, 1-72, 1994; Uhlmann et al, Chem. Rev. 90, 543-583, 1990.
  • Modifications of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene expression can be obtained by designing antisense oligonucleotides that will form duplexes to the control, 5', or regulatory regions of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene. Oligonucleotides derived from the transcription initiation site, e.g., between positions -10 and +10 from the start site, are preferred. Similarly, inhibition can be achieved using "triple helix" base-pairing methodology. Triple helix pairing is useful because it causes inhibition of the ability of the double helix to open sufficiently for the binding of polymerases, transcription factors, or chaperons.
  • An antisense oligonucleotide also can be designed to block translation of mRNA by preventing the transcript from binding to ribosomes. See WO 01/98340.
  • Ribozymes are RNA molecules with catalytic activity. See, e.g., Cech, Science 236,
  • Ribozymes can be used to inhibit gene function by cleaving an RNA sequence, as is known in the art (e.g., Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673).
  • the mechanism of ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage. Examples include engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that can specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of specific nucleotide sequences.
  • the coding sequence of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be used to generate ribozymes that will specifically bind to mRNA transcribed from the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide.
  • Methods of designing and constructing ribozymes which can cleave other RNA molecules in trans in a highly sequence specific manner have been developed and described in the art (see Haseloff et al Nature 334, 585-591, 1988).
  • the cleavage activity of ribozymes can be targeted to specific RNAs by engineering a discrete "hybridization" region into the ribozyme.
  • the hybridization region contains a sequence complementary to the target RNA and thus specifically hybridizes with the target (see, for example, Gerlach et al, EP 321,201). See WO 01/98340.
  • genes whose products interact with human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor may represent genes that are differentially expressed in disorders including, but not limited to cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal and liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders and urologic disorders. Further, such genes may represent genes that are differentially regulated in response to manipulations relevant to the progression or treatment of such diseases.
  • genes may have a temporally modulated expression, increased or decreased at different stages of tissue or organism development.
  • a differentially expressed gene may also have its expression modulated under control versus experimental conditions.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene or gene product may itself be tested for differential expression.
  • the degree to which expression differs in a normal versus a diseased state need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques.
  • standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques.
  • Other such standard characterization techniques by which expression differences may be visualized include but are not limited to, quantitative RT (reverse transcriptase), PCR, and Northern analysis.
  • RNA or, preferably, mRNA is isolated from tissues of interest.
  • RNA samples are obtained from tissues of experimental subjects and from corresponding tissues of control subjects.
  • RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA may be utilized for the purification of such RNA samples. See, for example, Ausubel et al, ed., CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, 1987-1993. Large numbers of tissue samples may readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski, U.S. Patent 4,843,155.
  • Transcripts within the collected RNA samples that represent RNA produced by differentially expressed genes are identified by methods well known to those of skill in the art. They include, for example, differential screening (Tedder et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85, 208-12, 1988), subtractive hybridization (Hedrick et al, Nature 308, 149-53; Lee et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 2825, 1984), and, preferably, differential display (Liang & Pardee, Science 257, 967-71, 1992; U.S. Patent 5,262,311).
  • the differential expression information may itself suggest relevant methods for the treatment of disorders involving the human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
  • treatment may include a modulation of expression of the differentially expressed genes and/or the gene encoding the human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor.
  • the differential expression information may indicate whether the expression or activity of the differentially expressed gene or gene product or the human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene or gene product are up-regulated or down-regulated.
  • the invention provides assays for screening test compounds that bind to or modulate the activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide.
  • a test compound preferably binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide. More preferably, a test compound decreases or increases functional activity by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% relative to the absence of the test compound.
  • Test compounds preferably binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide. More preferably, a test compound decreases or increases functional activity by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% relative to the absence of the test compound.
  • Test compounds can be pharmacologic agents already known in the art or can be compounds previously unknown to have any pharmacological activity.
  • the compounds can be naturally occurring or designed in the laboratory. They can be isolated from microorganisms, animals, or plants, and can be produced recombinantly, or synthesized by chemical methods known in the art. If desired, test compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous combinatorial library methods known in the art, including but not limited to, biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the "one-bead one-compound” library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
  • the biological library approach is limited to polypeptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to polypeptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds. See Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12, 145, 1997.
  • Test compounds can be screened for the ability to bind to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides or polynucleotides or to affect growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor activity or growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene expression using high throughput screening.
  • high throughput screening many discrete compounds can be tested in parallel so that large numbers of test compounds can be quickly screened.
  • the most widely established techniques utilize 96-well microtiter plates. The wells of the microtiter plates typically require assay volumes that range from 50 to 500 ⁇ l.
  • many instruments, materials, pipettors, robotics, plate washers, and plate readers are commercially available to fit the 96-well format.
  • free format assays or assays that have no physical barrier between samples, can be used.
  • an assay using pigment cells (melanocytes) in a simple homogeneous assay for combinatorial peptide libraries is described by Jayawickreme et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 19, 1614-18 (1994).
  • the cells are placed under agarose in petri dishes, then beads that carry combinatorial compounds are placed on the surface of the agarose.
  • the combinatorial compounds are partially released the compounds from the beads. Active compounds can be visualized as dark pigment areas because, as the compounds diffuse locally into the gel matrix, the active compounds cause the cells to change colors.
  • Chelsky "Strategies for Screening Combinatorial Libraries: Novel and Traditional Approaches," reported at the First Annual Conference of The Society for Biomolecular Screening in Philadelphia, Pa. (Nov. 7-10, 1995).
  • Chelsky placed a simple homogenous enzyme assay for carbonic anhydrase inside an agarose gel such that the enzyme in the gel would cause a color change throughout the gel.
  • beads carrying combinatorial compounds via a photolinker were placed inside the gel and the compounds were partially released by UV-light. Compounds that inhibited the enzyme were observed as local zones of inhibition having less color change.
  • Salmon et al Molecular Diversity 2, 57-63 (1996).
  • combinatorial libraries were screened for compounds that had cytotoxic effects on cancer cells growing in agar.
  • test samples are placed in a porous matrix.
  • One or more assay components are then placed within, on top of, or at the bottom of a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support.
  • a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support.
  • the test compound is preferably a small molecule that binds to the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, such that normal biological activity is prevented.
  • small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide-like molecules.
  • either the test compound or the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can comprise a detectable label, such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase. Detection of a test compound that is bound to the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can then be accomplished, for example, by direct counting of radioemmission, by scintillation counting, or by determining conversion of an appropriate substrate to a detectable product.
  • a detectable label such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase.
  • binding of a test compound to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be determined without labeling either of the interactants.
  • a microphysiometer can be used to detect binding of a test compound with a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • a microphysiometer e.g., CytosensorTM
  • a microphysiometer is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between a test compound and a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (McConnell et al, Science 257, 1906-1912, 1992).
  • Determining the ability of a test compound to bind to a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide also can be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Bimolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander & Urbaniczky, Anal. Chem. 63, 2338-2345, 1991, and Szabo et al, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5,
  • BIA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcoreTM). Changes in the optical phenomenon surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
  • SPR surface plasmon resonance
  • a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be used as a "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,283,317; Zervos et al, Cell 72, 223-232, 1993; Madura et al, J. Biol. Chem. 268, 12046-12054, 1993; Bartel et al, BioTechniques 14, 920-924, 1993; Iwabuchi et al, Oncogene 8, 1693-1696, 1993; and Brent W094/10300), to identify other proteins which bind to or interact with the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide and modulate its activity.
  • the two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains.
  • the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs.
  • polynucleotide encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4).
  • a DNA sequence that encodes an unidentified protein (“prey" or "sample” can be fused to a polynucleotide that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor.
  • the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ), which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression of the reporter gene can be detected, and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the DNA sequence encoding the protein that interacts with the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • a reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • either the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound can be bound to a solid support.
  • suitable solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass or plastic slides, tissue culture plates, microtiter wells, tubes, silicon chips, or particles such as beads (including, but not limited to, latex, polystyrene, or glass beads).
  • any method known in the art can be used to attach the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound to a solid support, including use of covalent and non-covalent linkages, passive absorption, or pairs of binding moieties attached respectively to the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound and the solid support.
  • Test compounds are preferably bound to the solid support in an array, so that the location of individual test compounds can be tracked. Binding of a test compound to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (or polynucleotide) can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtiter plates, test tubes, and microcentrifuge tubes.
  • the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is a fusion protein comprising a domain that allows the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide to be bound to a solid support.
  • glutathione-S-transferase fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and the non-adsorbed growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide; the mixture is then incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound components. Binding of the interactants can be determined either directly or indirectly, as described above.
  • the complexes can be dissociated from the solid support before binding is determined.
  • a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or a test compound can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin.
  • Biotinylated growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides (or polynucleotides) or test compounds can be prepared from biotin-NHS(N- hydroxy- succinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce
  • Methods for detecting such complexes include immunodetection of complexes using anti- bodies which specifically bind to the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or test compound and SDS gel electrophoresis under non-reducing conditions.
  • Screening for test compounds which bind to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide also can be carried out in an intact cell. Any cell which comprises a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. A growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Binding of the test compound to a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide is determined as described above.
  • Test compounds can be tested for the ability to increase or decrease the functional activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. Functional activity can be measured as described in the specific examples, below.
  • Functional assays can be carried out after contacting either a purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, a cell membrane preparation, or an intact cell with a test compound.
  • a test compound that decreases functional activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor activity.
  • a test compound which increases functional activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor activity.
  • test compounds that increase or decrease growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor gene expression are identified.
  • a growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide is contacted with a test compound, and the expression of an RNA or polypeptide product of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide is determined.
  • the level of expression of appropriate mRNA or polypeptide in the presence of the test compound is compared to the level of expression of mRNA or polypeptide in the absence of the test compound.
  • the test compound can then be identified as a modulator of expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of mRNA or polypeptide is greater in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as a stimulator or enhancer of the mRNA or polypeptide expression. Alternatively, when expression of the mRNA or polypeptide is less in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of the mRNA or polypeptide expression.
  • the level of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor mRNA or polypeptide expression in the cells can be determined by methods well known in the art for detecting mRNA or polypeptide. Either qualitative or quantitative methods can be used.
  • the presence of polypeptide products of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be determined, for example, using a variety of techniques known in the art, including immunochemical methods such as radioimmunoassay, Western blotting, and immunohistochemistry.
  • polypeptide synthesis can be determined in vivo, in a cell culture, or in an in vitro translation system by detecting incorporation of labeled amino acids into a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • Such screening can be carried out either in a cell-free assay system or in an intact cell.
  • Any cell that expresses a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system.
  • the growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above.
  • Either a primary culture or an established cell line, such as CHO or human embryonic kidney 293 cells, can be used.
  • compositions of the invention can comprise, for example, a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide, ribozymes or antisense oligonucleotides, antibodies which specifically bind to a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, or mimetics, activators, or inhibitors of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide activity.
  • the compositions can be administered alone or in combination with at least one other agent, such as stabilizing compound, which can be administered in any sterile, biocompatible pharmaceutical carrier, including, but not limited to, saline, buffered saline, dextrose, and water.
  • the compositions can be administered to a patient alone, or in combination with other agents, drugs or hormones.
  • compositions of the invention can be administered by any number of routes including, but not limited to, oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intramedullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, parenteral, topical, sublingual, or rectal means.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration can be formulated using pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art in dosages suitable for oral administration. Such carriers enable the pharmaceutical compositions to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, and the like, for ingestion by the patient.
  • compositions for oral use can be obtained through combination of active compounds with solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores.
  • suitable excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers, such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose, such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; gums including arabic and tragacanth; and proteins such as gelatin and collagen.
  • disintegrating or solubilizing agents can be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores can be used in conjunction with suitable coatings, such as concentrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound, i.e., dosage.
  • compositions that can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating, such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • Push-fit capsules can contain active ingredients mixed with a filler or binders, such as lactose or starches, lubricants, such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers.
  • the active compounds can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
  • compositions suitable for parenteral administration can be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiologically buffered saline.
  • Aqueous injection suspensions can contain substances that increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran.
  • suspensions of the active compounds can be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions.
  • Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes.
  • Non-lipid polycationic amino polymers also can be used for delivery.
  • the suspension also can contain suitable stabilizers or agents that increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.
  • penetrants appropriate to the particular barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be manufactured in a manner that is known in the art, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping, or lyophilizing processes.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be provided as a salt and can be formed with many acids, including but not limited to, hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free base forms.
  • the preferred preparation can be a lyophilized powder which can contain any or all of the following: 1-50 mM histidine, 0.1%-2% sucrose, and 2-7% mannitol, at a pH range of 4.5 to 5.5, that is combined with buffer prior to use.
  • compositions After pharmaceutical compositions have been prepared, they can be placed in an appropriate container and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition. Such labeling would include amount, frequency, and method of administration.
  • the human GHRH receptor can be regulated to treat cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal and liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders and urologic disorders.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following cardiovascular related tissues: heart atrium (left), heart ventricle (left), aorta, artery, vein. Expression in the above mentioned tissues demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose cardiovascular diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat cardiovascular diseases. Cardiovascular diseases include but are not limited to disorders of the heart and the vascular system like congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, ischemic diseases of the heart, all kinds of atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, hypertensive vascular diseases, peripheral vascular diseases, and atherosclerosis.
  • Heart failure is defined as a pathophysiological state in which an abnormality of cardiac function is responsible for the failure of the heart to pump blood at a rate commensurate with the requirement of the metabolizing tissue. It includes all forms of pumping failures such as high-output and low-output, acute and chronic, right-sided or left-sided, systolic or diastolic, independent of the underlying cause.
  • MI Myocardial infarction
  • Ischemic diseases are conditions in which the coronary flow is restricted resulting in a perfusion which is inadequate to meet the myocardial requirement for oxygen.
  • This group of diseases includes stable angina, unstable angina and asymptomatic ischemia.
  • Arrhythmias include all forms of atrial and ventricular tachyarrhythmias, atrial tachycardia, atrial flutter, atrial fibrillation, atrio-ventricular reentrant tachycardia, preexitation syndrome, ventricular tachycardia, ventricular flutter, ventricular fibrillation, as well as bradycardic forms of arrhythmias.
  • Hypertensive vascular diseases include primary as well as all kinds of secondary arterial hypertension, renal, endocrine, neurogenic, others.
  • the genes may be used as drug targets for the treatment of hypertension as well as for the prevention of all complications arising from cardiovascular diseases.
  • Peripheral vascular diseases are defined as vascular diseases in which arterial and/or venous flow is reduced resulting in an imbalance between blood supply and tissue oxygen demand. It includes chronic peripheral arterial occlusive disease (PAOD), acute arterial thrombosis and embolism, inflammatory vascular disorders, Raynaud's phenomenon and venous disorders.
  • PAOD peripheral arterial occlusive disease
  • acute arterial thrombosis and embolism inflammatory vascular disorders
  • Raynaud's phenomenon Raynaud's phenomenon
  • Atherosclerosis is a cardiovascular disease in which the vessel wall is remodeled, compromising the lumen of the vessel.
  • the atherosclerotic remodeling process involves accumulation of cells, both smooth muscle cells and monocyte/macrophage inflammatory cells, in the intima of the vessel wall. These cells take up lipid, likely from the circulation, to form a mature atherosclerotic lesion.
  • the formation of these lesions is a chronic process, occurring over decades of an adult human life, the majority of the morbidity associated with atherosclerosis occurs when a lesion ruptures, releasing thrombogenic debris that rapidly occludes the artery. When such an acute event occurs in the coronary artery, myocardial infarction can ensue, and in the worst case, can result in death.
  • the formation of the atherosclerotic lesion can be considered to occur in five overlapping stages such as migration, lipid accumulation, recruitment of inflammatory cells, proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells, and extracellular matrix deposition.
  • stages such as migration, lipid accumulation, recruitment of inflammatory cells, proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells, and extracellular matrix deposition.
  • Each of these processes can be shown to occur in man and in animal models of atherosclerosis, but the relative contribution of each to the pathology and clinical significance of the lesion is unclear.
  • hyperlipidemia abnormally high levels of fats (cholesterol, triglycerides, or both) in the blood, may be caused by family history of hyperlipidemia, obesity, a high-fat diet, lack of exercise, moderate to high alcohol consumption, cigarette smoking, poorly controlled diabetes, and an underactive thyroid gland), hereditary hyper- lipidemias (type I hyperlipoproteinemia (familial hyperchylomicronemia), type II hyperlipoproteinemia (familial hypercholesterolemia), type III hyperlipoproteinemia, type IV hyperlipoproteinemia, or type V hyperlipoproteinemia), hypolipo- proteinemia, lipidoses (caused by abnormalities in the enzymes that metabolize fats), Gaucher's disease, Niemann-Pick disease, Fabry's disease, Wolman's disease, cerebrotendinous xanthomatosis, sitosterolemia, Refsum's disease, or Tay-Sachs disease.
  • hyperlipidemia abnormally high levels of fats (cholesterol, t
  • Kidney disorders may lead to hyper or hypotension. Examples for kidney problems possibly leading to hypertension are renal artery stenosis, pyelonephritis, glomerulonephritis, kidney tumors, polycistic kidney disease, injury to the kidney, or radiation therapy affecting the kidney. Excessive urination may lead to hypotension.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the gastroenterological system: colon, colon tumor, liver, liver liver cirrhosis.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue colon tumor and healthy tissue colon, between diseased tissue liver liver cirrhosis and healthy tissue liver demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose gastroenterological disorders. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat gastroenterological disorders.
  • Gastrointestinal diseases comprise primary or secondary, acute or chronic diseases of the organs of the gastrointestinal tract which may be acquired or inherited, benign or malignant or metaplastic, and which may affect the organs of the gastrointestinal tract or the body as a whole. They comprise but are not limited to 1) disorders of the esophagus like achalasia, vigoruos achalasia, dysphagia, cricopharyngeal incoordination, pre-esophageal dysphagia, diffuse esophageal spasm, globus sensation, Barrett's metaplasia, gastroesophageal reflux, 2) disorders of the stomach and duodenum like functional dyspepsia, inflammation of the gastric mucosa, gastritis, stress gastritis, chronic erosive gastritis, atrophy of gastric glands, metaplasia of gastric tissues, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, neoplasms of the stomach, 3) disorders of the pancreas like acute
  • Liver diseases comprise primary or secondary, acute or chronic diseases or injury of the liver which may be acquired or inherited, benign or malignant, and which may affect the liver or the body as a whole. They comprise but are not limited to disorders of the bilirubin metabolism, jaundice, syndroms of Gilbert's, Crigler-Najjar,
  • Dubin-Johnson and Rotor intrahepatic cholestasis, hepatomegaly, portal hypertension, ascites, Budd-Chiari syndrome, portal-systemic encephalopathy, fatty liver, steatosis, Reye's syndrome, liver diseases due to alcohol, alcoholic hepatitis or cirrhosis, fibrosis and cirrhosis, fibrosis and cirrhosis of the liver due to inborn errors of metabolism or exogenous substances, storage diseases, syndromes of Gaucher's,
  • Zellweger's Wilson's - disease, acute or chronic hepatitis, viral hepatitis and its variants, inflammatory conditions of the liver due to viruses, bacteria, fungi, protozoa, helminths; drug induced disorders of the liver, chronic liver diseases like primary sclerosing cholangitis, alphal-antitrypsin-deficiency, primary biliary cirrhosis, postoperative liver disorders like postoperative intrahepatic cholestasis, hepatic granulomas, vascular liver disorders associated with systemic disease, benign or malignant neoplasms of the liver, disturbance of liver metabolism in the new-born or prematurely born.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following cancer tissues: colon tumor, lung tumor, breast tumor, kidney tumor.
  • colon tumor lung tumor, breast tumor, kidney tumor.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue colon tumor and healthy tissue colon, between diseased tissue lung tumor and healthy tissue lung, between diseased tissue breast tumor and healthy tissue breast, between diseased tissue kidney tumor and healthy tissue kidney demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of cancer. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat cancer.
  • Cancer disorders within the scope of the invention comprise any disease of an organ or tissue in mammals characterized by poorly controlled or uncontrolled multiplication of normal or abnormal cells in that tissue and its effect on the body as a whole.
  • Cancer diseases within the scope of the invention comprise benign neoplasms, dysplasias, hyperplasias as well as neoplasms showing metastatic growth or any other transformations like e.g. leukoplakias which often precede a breakout of cancer.
  • Cells and tissues are cancerous when they grow more rapidly than normal cells, displacing or spreading into the surrounding healthy tissue or any other tissues of the body described as metastatic growth, assume abnormal shapes and sizes, show changes in their nucleocytoplasmatic ratio, nuclear polychromasia, and finally may cease.
  • Cancerous cells and tissues may affect the body as a whole when causing paraneoplastic syndromes or if cancer occurs within a vital organ or tissue, normal function will be impaired or halted, with possible fatal results.
  • the ultimate involvement of a vital organ by cancer, either primary or metastatic, may lead to the death of the mammal affected. Cancer tends to spread, and the extent of its spread is usually related to an individual's chances of surviving the disease.
  • Cancers are generally said to be in one of three stages of growth: early, or localized, when a tumor is still confined to the tissue of origin, or primary site; direct extension, where cancer cells from the tumour have invaded adjacent tissue or have spread only to regional lymph nodes; or metastasis, in which cancer cells have migrated to distant parts of the body from the primary site, via the blood or lymph systems, and have established secondary sites of infection.
  • Cancer is said to be malignant because of its tendency to cause death if not treated. Benign tumors usually do not cause death, although they may if they interfere with a normal body function by virtue of their location, size, or paraneoplastic side effects. Hence benign tumors fall under the definition of cancer within the scope of the invention as well.
  • cancer cells divide at a higher rate than do normal cells, but the distinction between the growth of cancerous and normal tissues is not so much the rapidity of cell division in the former as it is the partial or complete loss of growth restraint in cancer cells and their failure to differentiate into a useful, limited tissue of the type that characterizes the functional equilibrium of growth of normal tissue.
  • Cancer tissues may express certain molecular receptors and probably are influenced by the host's susceptibility and immunity and it is known that certain cancers of the breast and prostate, for example, are considered dependent on specific hormones for their existence.
  • the term "cancer" under the scope of the invention is not limited to simple benign neoplasia but comprises any other benign and malign neoplasia like 1) Carcinoma, 2)
  • Cancers of the blood-forming tissues 5) tumors of nerve tissues including the brain, 6) cancer of skin cells.
  • Cancer according to 1) occurs in epithelial tissues, which cover the outer body (the skin) and line mucous membranes and the inner cavitary structures of organs e.g. such as the breast, lung, the respiratory and gastrointestinal tracts, the endocrine glands, and the genitourinary system.
  • Ductal or glandular elements may persist in epithelial tumors , as in adenocarcinomas like e.g. thyroid adenocarcinoma, gastric adenocarcinoma, uterine adenocarcinoma.
  • Cancers of the pavement-cell epithelium of the skin and of certain mucous membranes may be termed epidermoid or squamous-cell carcinomas of the respective tissues and and are in the scope of the definition of cancer as well.
  • Cancer according to 2) develops in connective tissues, including fibrous tissues, adipose (fat) tissues, muscle, blood vessels, bone, and cartilage like e.g. osteogenic sarcoma; liposarcoma, fibrosarcoma, synovial sarcoma.
  • Cancer according to 3) is cancer that develops in both epithelial and connective tissue.
  • Cancer disease within the scope of this definition may be primary or secondary, whereby primary indicates that the cancer originated in the tissue where it is found rather than was established as a secondary site through metastasis from another lesion.
  • Cancers and tumor diseases within the scope of this definition may be benign or malign and may affect all anatomical structures of the body of a mammal.
  • they comprise cancers and tumor diseases of I) the bone marrow and bone marrow derived cells (leukemias), II) the endocrine and exocrine glands like e.g. thyroid, parathyroid, pituitary, adrenal glands, salivary glands, pancreas III) the breast, like e.g.
  • the mammary glands of either a male or a female the mammary ducts, adenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, comedo carcinoma, Paget's disease of the nipple, inflammatory carcinoma of the young woman, IV) the lung, V) the stomach, VI) the liver and spleen, VII) the small intestine, VIII) the colon, IX) the bone and its supportive and connective tissues like malignant or benign bone tumour, e.g.
  • malignant osteogenic sarcoma benign osteoma, cartilage tumors; like malignant chondrosarcoma or benign chondroma; bone marrow tumors like malignant myeloma or benign eosinophilic granuloma, as well as metastatic tumors from bone tissues at other locations of the body;
  • X) the mouth, throat, larynx, and the esophagus XI) the urinary bladder and the internal and external organs and structures of the urogenital system of male and female like ovaries, uterus, cervix of the uterus, testes, and prostate gland, XII) the prostate, XIII) the pancreas, like ductal carcinoma of the pancreas;
  • XIV) the lymphatic tissue like lymphomas and other tumors of lymphoid origin, XV) the skin, XVI) cancers and tumor diseases of all anatomical structures belonging to the the respiration and respiratory systems including thoracal
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following metabolic disease related tissues: liver, liver cirrhosis.
  • liver liver cirrhosis.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue liver liver cirrhosis and healthy tissue liver demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of metabolic diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat metabolic diseases.
  • Metabolic diseases are defined as conditions which result from an abnormality in any of the chemical or biochemical transformations and their regulating systems essential to producing energy, to regenerating cellular constituents, to eliminating unneeded products arising from these processes, and to regulate and maintain homeostasis in a mammal regardless of whether acquired or the result of a genetic transformation.
  • a single defective transformation or disturbance of its regulation may produce consequences that are narrow, involving a single body function, or broad, affecting many organs, organ-systems or the body as a whole.
  • Metabolic diseases often are caused by single defects in particular biochemical pathways, defects that are due to the deficient activity of individual enzymes or molecular receptors leading to the regulation of such enzymes. Hence in a broader sense disturbances of the underlying genes, their products and their regulation lie well within the scope of this definition of a metabolic disease.
  • metabolic diseases may affect 1) biochemical processes and tissues ubiquitous all over the body, 2) the bone, 3) the nervous system, 4) the endocrine system, 5) the muscle including the heart, 6) the skin and nervous tissue, 7) the urogenital system, 8) the homeostasis of body systems like water and electrolytes.
  • metabolic diseases according to 1) comprise obesity, amyloidosis, disturbances of the amino acid metabolism like branched chain disease, hyperaminoacidemia, hyperaminoaciduria, disturbances of the metabolism of urea, hyperammonemia, mucopolysaccharidoses e.g.
  • Maroteaux-Lamy syndrom storage diseases like glycogen storage diseases and lipid storage diseases, glycogenosis diseases like Cori's disease, malabsorption diseases like intestinal carbohydrate malabsorption, oligosaccharidase deficiency like maltase-, lactase-, sucrase- insufficiency, disorders of the metabolism of fructose, disorders of the metabolism of galactose, galactosaemia, disturbances of carbohydrate utilization like diabetes, hypoglycemia, disturbances of pyruvate metabolism, hypolipidemia, hypolipo- proteinemia, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, carnitine or carnitine acyltransferase deficiency, disturbances of the porphyrin metabolism, porphyrias, disturbances of the purine metabolism, lysosomal diseases, metabolic diseases of nerves and nervous systems like gangliosidoses, sphingolipidoses, sulfatidoses, leucodystroph
  • metabolic diseases according to 2) comprise osteoporosis, osteomalacia like osteoporosis, osteopenia, osteogenesis imperfecta, osteopetrosis, osteonecrosis, Paget's disease of bone, hypophosphatemia.
  • metabolic diseases according to 3) comprise cerebellar dysfunction, disturbances of brain metabolism like dementia, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's chorea, Parkinson's disease, Pick's disease, toxic encephalopathy, demyelinating neuropathies like inflammatory neuropathy, Guillain-Barre syndrome.
  • metabolic diseases comprise primary and secondary metabolic disorders associated with hormonal defects like any disorder stemming from either an hyperfunction or hypofunction of some hormone-secreting endocrine gland and any combination thereof. They comprise Sipple's syndrome, pituitary gland dysfunction and its effects on other endocrine glands, such as the thyroid, adrenals, ovaries, and testes, acromegaly, hyper- and hypothyroidism, euthyroid goiter, euthyroid sick syndrome, thyroiditis, and thyroid cancer, over- or underproduction of the adrenal steroid hormones, adrenogenital syndrome, Cushing's syndrome, Addison's disease of the adrenal cortex, Addison's pernicious anemia, primary and secondary aldosteronism, diabetes insipidus, carcinoid syndrome, disturbances caused by the dysfunction of the parathyroid glands, pancreatic islet cell dysfunction, diabetes, disturbances of the endocrine system of the female like estrogen deficiency,
  • metabolic diseases comprise muscle weakness, myotonia, Duchenne's and other muscular dystrophies, dystrophia myotonica of Steinert, mitochondrial myopathies like disturbances of the catabolic metabolism in the muscle, carbohydrate and lipid storage myopathies, glycogenoses, myoglobinuria, malignant hyperthermia, polymyalgia rheumatica, dermatomyositis, primary myocardial disease, cardiomyopathy.
  • metabolic diseases according to 5 comprise muscle weakness, myotonia, Duchenne's and other muscular dystrophies, dystrophia myotonica of Steinert, mitochondrial myopathies like disturbances of the catabolic metabolism in the muscle, carbohydrate and lipid storage myopathies, glycogenoses, myoglobinuria, malignant hyperthermia, polymyalgia rheumatica, dermatomyositis, primary myocardial disease, cardiomyopathy.
  • metabolic diseases according to 6 comprise disorders of the ectoderm, neurofibromatosis, scleroderma and polyarteritis, Louis-Bar syndrome, von Hippel-Lindau disease, Sturge- Weber syndrome, tuberous sclerosis, amyloidosis, porphyria.
  • metabolic diseases according to 7 comprise sexual dysfunction of the male and female.
  • metabolic diseases according to 8) comprise confused states and seizures due to inappropriate secretion of antidiuretic hormone from the pituitary gland, Liddle's syndrome, Bartter's syndrome, Fanconi's syndrome, renal electrolyte wasting, diabetes insipidus.
  • Diabetes mellitus is a common metabolic disorder characterized by an abnormal elevation in blood glucose, alterations in lipids and abnormalities (complications) in the cardiovascular system, eye, kidney and nervous system. Diabetes is divided into two separate diseases: type 1 diabetes (juvenile onset), which results from a loss of cells which make and secrete insulin, and type 2 diabetes (adult onset), which is caused by a defect in insulin secretion and a defect in insulin action.
  • type 1 diabetes juvenile onset
  • type 2 diabetes adult onset
  • Type 1 diabetes is initiated by an autoimmune reaction that attacks the insulin secreting cells (beta cells) in the pancreatic islets.
  • Agents that prevent this reaction from occurring or that stop the reaction before destruction of the beta cells has been accomplished are potential therapies for this disease.
  • Other agents that induce beta cell proliferation and regeneration also are potential therapies.
  • Type II diabetes is the most common of the two diabetic conditions (6% of the population).
  • the defect in insulin secretion is an important cause of the diabetic condition and results from an inability of the beta cell to properly detect and respond to rises in blood glucose levels with insulin release.
  • Therapies that increase the response by the beta cell to glucose would offer an important new treatment for this disease.
  • the defect in insulin action in Type II diabetic subjects is another target for therapeutic intervention.
  • Agents that increase the activity of the insulin receptor in muscle, liver, and fat will cause a decrease in blood glucose and a normalization of plasma lipids.
  • the receptor activity can be increased by agents that directly stimulate the receptor or that increase the intracellular signals from the receptor.
  • Other therapies can directly activate the cellular end process, i.e. glucose transport or various enzyme systems, to generate an insulin-like effect and therefore a produce beneficial outcome. Because overweight subjects have a greater susceptibility to Type II diabetes, any agent that reduces body weight is a possible therapy.
  • Type I and Type diabetes can be treated with agents that mimic insulin action or that treat diabetic complications by reducing blood glucose levels.
  • agents that reduces new blood vessel growth can be used to treat the eye complications that develop in both diseases.
  • Obesity and overweight are defined as an excess of body fat relative to lean body mass. An increase in caloric intake or a decrease in energy expenditure or both can bring about this imbalance leading to surplus energy being stored as fat. Obesity is associated with important medical morbidities and an increase in mortality. The causes of obesity are poorly understood and may be due to genetic factors, environmental factors or a combination of the two to cause a positive energy balance. In contrast, anorexia and cachexia are characterized by an imbalance in energy intake versus energy expenditure leading to a negative energy balance and weight loss. Agents that either increase energy expenditure and/or decrease energy intake, absorption or storage would be useful for treating obesity, overweight, and associated comorbidities. Agents that either increase energy intake and/or decrease energy expenditure or increase the amount of lean tissue would be useful for treating cachexia, anorexia and wasting disorders.
  • This gene, translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity, overweight, anorexia, cachexia, wasting disorders, appetite suppression, appetite enhancement, increases or decreases in satiety, modulation of body weight, and/or other eating disorders such as bulimia.
  • this gene translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity/overweight-associated comorbidities including hypertension, type 2 diabetes, coronary artery disease, hyperlipidemia, stroke, gallbladder disease, gout, osteoarthritis, sleep apnea and respiratory problems, some types of cancer including endometrial, breast, prostate, and colon cancer, thrombolic disease, polycystic ovarian syndrome, reduced fertility, complications of pregnancy, menstrual irregularities, hirsutism, stress incontinence, and depression.
  • obesity/overweight-associated comorbidities including hypertension, type 2 diabetes, coronary artery disease, hyperlipidemia, stroke, gallbladder disease, gout, osteoarthritis, sleep apnea and respiratory problems, some types of cancer including endometrial, breast, prostate, and colon cancer, thrombolic disease, polycystic ovarian syndrome, reduced fertility, complications of pregnancy, menstrual irregularities, hirsu
  • G protein-coupled receptors are integral membrane proteins characterized by seven transmembrane spanning helical domains that mediate the actions of many extracellular signals. GPCRs interact with heterotrimeric guanine nucleotide binding regulatory proteins (G proteins) that modulate a variety of second messenger systems or ionic conductances to effect physiological responses. In fact, almost 50% of currently marketed drugs elicit their therapeutic effects by interacting with GPCRs
  • a number of peripherally and centrally acting signaling molecules produce a sense of hunger/satiety or produce elevation in lipid mobilization/oxidation through their interactions with GPCRs.
  • GPCRs There are numerous examples of neurotransmitters and hormones acting on central satiety pathways. Endocannabinoids, melanin concen- trating hormone, serotonin, dopamine, NPY, ⁇ -MSH, GLP-1, ghrelin and orexin serve as few examples of neurotransmitters/hormones that modulate satiety and/or energy expenditure through GPCRs (Di Marzo et al, Nature ⁇ 70:822-25, 2001; Marsh et al, Proc. Natl.
  • GPCRs In addition to modulation of central pathways, GPCRs also play a critical role in regulating energy expenditure in the periphery. For example, selective agonist ligands of ⁇ 3-adrenergic receptors (AR) induce increase in lipolysis and lipid oxidation in rodents resulting in a decrease in body weight (Arch, Eur. J. Pharmacol. 440: 99-107, 2002). A number of ⁇ 3-AR agonists are currently being evaluated in clinical trials for their anti-obesity and anti-diabetic effects. In summary, GPCRs constitute an attractive drug target for the development of effective anti-obesity agents.
  • AR ⁇ 3-adrenergic receptors
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the immune system and tissues responsive to components of the immune system as well as in the following tissues responsive to mediators of inflammation: liver - liver cirrhosis.
  • liver - liver cirrhosis The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue liver cirrhosis and healthy tissue liver demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of inflammatory diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat inflammatory diseases.
  • Inflammatory diseases comprise diseases triggered by cellular or non-cellular mediators of the immune system or tissues causing the inflammation of body tissues and subsequently producing an acute or chronic inflammatory condition.
  • hypersensitivity reactions of type I - IV, for example but not limited to hypersensitivity diseases of the lung including asthma, atopic diseases, allergic rhinitis or conjunctivitis, angioedema of the lids, hereditary angioedema, antireceptor hypersensitivity reactions and autoimmune diseases, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Goodpasture's syndrome, pemphigus, myasthenia gravis, Grave's and Raynaud's disease, type B insulin- resistant diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, Crohn's disease, scleroderma, mixed connective tissue disease, polymyositis, sarcoidosis, glomerulonephritis, acute or chronic host versus
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the hematological system: thrombocytes.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of hematological diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat hematological disorders.
  • Hematological disorders comprise diseases of the blood and all its constituents as well as diseases of organs involved in the generation or degradation of the blood. They include but are not limited to 1) Anemias, 2) Myeloproliferative Disorders, 3) Hemorrhagic Disorders, 4) Leukopenia, 5) Eosinophilic Disorders, 6) Leukemias, 7)
  • Disorders of the Spleen in the course of hematological disorders include, but are not limited to anemias due to defective or deficient hem synthesis, deficient erythropoiesis.
  • Disorders according to 2) include, but are not limited to polycythemia vera, tumor-associated erythrocytosis, myelofibrosis, thrombocythemia.
  • Disorders according to 3) include, but are not limited to vasculitis, thrombocytopenia, heparin-induced thrombocytopenia, thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, hemolytic-uremic syndrome, hereditary and aquired disorders of platelet function, hereditary coagulation disorders.
  • Disorders according to 4) include, but are not limited to neutropenia, lymphocytopenia.
  • Disorders according to 5) include, but are not limited to hypereosinophilia, idiopathic hypereosinophilic syndrome.
  • Disorders according to 6) include, but are not limited to acute myeloic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, myelodysplastic syndrome.
  • Disorders according to 7) include, but are not limited to Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, Burkitt's lymphoma, mycosis fungoides cutaneous T-cell lymphoma.
  • Disorders according to 8) include, but are not limited to multiple myeloma, macroglobulinemia, heavy chain diseases.
  • iron deficiency anemia In extension of the preceding idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura, iron deficiency anemia, megaloblastic anemia (vitamin B12 deficiency), aplastic anemia, thalassemia, , malignant lymphoma bone marrow invasion, malignant lymphoma skin invasion, haemolytic uraemic syndrome, giant platelet disease are considered to be hematological diseases too.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following brain tissues: brain, alzheimer brain, frontal lobe, alzheimer brain frontal lobe, dorsal root ganglia.
  • brain tissues brain, alzheimer brain, frontal lobe, alzheimer brain frontal lobe, dorsal root ganglia.
  • the expression in brain tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue alzheimer brain and healthy tissue brain, between diseased tissue alzheimer brain frontal lobe and healthy tissue frontal lobe demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose nervous system diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat nervous system diseases.
  • CNS disorders include disorders of the central nervous system as well as disorders of the peripheral nervous system.
  • CNS disorders include, but are not limited to brain injuries, cerebrovascular diseases and their consequences, Parkinson's disease, corticobasal degeneration, motor neuron disease, dementia, including ALS, multiple sclerosis, traumatic brain injury, stroke, post-stroke, post-traumatic brain injury, and small-vessel cerebrovascular disease.
  • Dementias such as Alzheimer's disease, vascular dementia, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia and Parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17, frontotemporal dementias, including Pick's disease, progressive nuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, Huntington's disease, thalamic degeneration, Creutzfeld-Jakob dementia, HIV dementia, schizophrenia with dementia, and Korsakoff s psychosis, within the meaning of the invention are also considered to be CNS disorders.
  • CNS disorders such as mild cognitive impairment, age-associated memory impairment, age-related cognitive decline, vascular cognitive impairment, attention deficit disorders, attention deficit hyperactivity disorders, and memory disturbances in children with learning disabilities are also considered to be CNS disorders.
  • Pain within the meaning of the invention, is also considered to be a CNS disorder. Pain can be associated with CNS disorders, such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemorrhage, vascular malformation).
  • CNS disorders such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemorrhage, vascular malformation).
  • Non-central neuropathic pain includes that associated with post mastectomy pain, phantom feeling, reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD), trigeminal neuralgiaradioculopathy, post-surgical pain, HIV/AIDS related pain, cancer pain, metabolic neuropathies (e.g., diabetic neuropathy, vasculitic neuropathy secondary to connective tissue disease), paraneoplastic polyneuropathy associated, for example, with carcinoma of lung, or leukemia, or lymphoma, or carcinoma of prostate, colon or stomach, trigeminal neuralgia, cranial neuralgias, and post-herpetic neuralgia. Pain associated with peripheral nerve damage, central pain (i.e.
  • a disorder of the nervous system are acute pain, for example postoperative pain, and pain after trauma.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the respiratory system: lung, lung tumor.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue lung tumor and healthy tissue lung demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of respiratory diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat those diseases.
  • allergens typically elicit a specific IgE response and, although in most cases the allergens themselves have little or no intrinsic toxicity, they induce pathology when the IgE response in turn elicits an IgE-dependent or T cell-dependent hypersensitivity reaction.
  • Hypersensitivity reactions can be local or systemic and typically occur within minutes after allergen exposure in individuals who have previously been sensitized to the respective allergen.
  • the hypersensitivity reaction of allergy develops when the allergen is recognized by IgE antibodies bound to specific receptors on the surface of effector cells, such as mast cells, basophils, or eosinophils, which causes the activation of the effector cells and the release of mediators that produce the acute signs and symptoms of the reactions.
  • Allergic diseases include asthma, allergic rhinitis (hay fever), atopic dermatitis, and anaphylaxis.
  • Asthma is though to arise as a result of interactions between multiple genetic and environmental factors and is characterized by three major features: 1) intermittent and reversible airway obstruction caused by bronchoconstriction, increased mucus production, and thickening of the walls of the airways that leads to a narrowing of the airways, 2) airway hyperresponsiveness, and 3) airway inflammation.
  • Certain cells are critical to the inflammatory reaction of asthma and they include T cells and antigen presenting cells, B cells that produce IgE, and mast cells, basophils, eosinophils, and other cells that bind IgE. These effector cells accumulate at the site of allergic reaction in the airways and release toxic products that contribute to the acute pathology and eventually to tissue destruction related to the disorder.
  • Other resident cells such as smooth muscle cells, lung epithelial cells, mucus-producing cells, and nerve cells may also be abnormal in individuals with asthma and may contribute to its pathology. While the airway obstruction of asthma, presenting clinically as an intermittent wheeze and shortness of breath, is generally the most pressing symptom of the disease requiring immediate treatment, the inflammation and tissue destruction associated with the disease can lead to irreversible changes that eventually makes asthma a chronic and disabling disorder requiring long-term management.
  • Commonly used therapeutic agents can act as symptom relievers to transiently improve pulmonary function, but do not affect the underlying inflammation.
  • Agents that can reduce the underlying inflammation such as anti-inflammatory steroids, may have major drawbacks which range from immunosuppression to bone loss.
  • many of the present therapies such as inhaled corticosteroids, are short-lasting, inconvenient to use, and must be used often on a regular, in some cases lifelong basis, making failure of patients to comply with the treatment a major problem and thereby reducing their effectiveness as a treatment. Because of the problems associated with conventional therapies, alternative treatment strategies have been evaluated.
  • Glycophorin A, cyclosporin and a nonapeptide fragment of IL-2 all inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation; however, they are known to have many other effects.
  • cyclosporin is used as a immunosuppressant after organ transplantation. While these agents may represent alternatives to steroids in the treatment of asthmatics, they inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation and potentially critical immune functions associated with homeostasis.
  • Other treatments that block the release or activity of mediators of bronchoconstriction, such as cromones or anti-leukotrienes have recently been introduced for the treatment of mild asthma, but they are expensive and not effective in all patients and it is unclear whether they affect the chronic changes associated with asthmatic inflammation at all. What is needed in the art is the identification of a treatment that can act on pathways critical to the development of asthma and that both blocks the episodic attacks of the disorder and which dampens the hyperactive allergic immune response without immunocompromising the patient.
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary (or airways) disease
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary (or airways) disease
  • Emphysema is characterised by destruction of alveolar walls leading to abnormal enlargement of the air spaces of the lung.
  • Chronic bronchitis is defined clinically as the presence of chronic productive cough for three months in each of two successive years.
  • airflow obstruction is usually progressive and is only partially reversible. By far the most important risk factor for development of COPD is cigarette smoking, although the disease does also occur in non-smokers.
  • Chronic inflammation of the airways is a key pathological feature of COPD.
  • the inflammatory cell population comprises increased numbers of macrophages, neutrophils and CD8 + lymphocyes.
  • Inhaled irritants such as cigarette smoke activate macrophages resident in the respiratory tract as well as epithelial cells leading to release of chemokines (e.g., interleukin-8) and other chemotactic factors which act to increase the neutrophil monocyte trafficking from the blood into lung tissue and airways.
  • chemokines e.g., interleukin-8
  • Neutrophils and monocytes recruited into the airways can release a variety of potentially damaging mediators such as proteolytic enzymes and reactive oxygen species.
  • Matrix degradation and emphysema, along with airway wall thickening, surfactant dysfunction and mucus hypersecretion are all potential sequelae of this inflammatory response that lead to impaired airflow and gas exchange.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the reproduction system: breast, breast tumor.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue breast tumor and healthy tissue breast demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of reproduction disorders. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat reproduction disorders.
  • disorders of the male reproductive system include but are not limited to balanoposthitis, balanitis xerotica obliterans, phimosis, paraphimosis, erythroplasia of Queyrat, skin cancer of the penis, Bowen's and Paget's diseases, syphilis, herpes simplex infections, genital warts, molluscum contagiosum, priapism, peyronie's disease, benign prostatic hype ⁇ lasia (BPH), prostate cancer, prostatitis, testicular cancer, testicular torsion, inguinal hernia, epididymo-orchitis, mumps, hydroceles, spermatoceles, or varicoceles.
  • Impotence erectile dysfunction
  • disorders of the female reproductive include premature menopause, pelvic pain, vaginitis, vulvitis, vulvovaginitis, pelvic inflammatory disease, fibroids, menstrual disorders (premenstrual syndrome (PMS), dysmenorrhea, amenorrhea, primary amenorrhea, secondary amenorrhea, menorrhagia, hypomenorrhea, poly- menorrhea, oligomenorrhea, metrorrhagia, menometrorrhagia, Postmenopausal bleeding), bleeding caused by a physical disorder, dysfunctional uterine bleeding, polycystic ovary syndrome (Stein-Leventhal syndrome), endometriosis, cancer of the uterus, cancer of the cervix, cancer of the ovaries, cancer of the vulva, cancer of the vagina, cancer of the fallopian tubes, hydatidiform mole,
  • Infertility may be caused by problems with sperm, ovulation, the fallopian tubes, and the cervix as well as unidentified factors.
  • Complications of pregnancy include miscarriage and stillbirth, ectopic pregnancy, anemia, Rh incompatibility, problems with the placenta, excessive vomiting, preeclampsia, eclampsia, and skin rashes (e.g. he ⁇ es gestationis, urticaria of pregnancy) as well as preterm labor and premature rupture of the membranes.
  • Breast disorders may be noncancerous (benign) or cancerous (malignant). Examples of breast disorders are but are not limited to breast pain, cysts, fibrocystic breast disease, fibrous lumps, nipple discharge, breast infection, breast cancer (ductal carcinoma, lobular carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, and inflammatory breast cancer), Paget's disease of the nipple or Cystosarcoma phyllodes.
  • Urologic Disorders are examples of breast pain, cysts, fibrocystic breast disease, fibrous lumps, nipple discharge, breast infection, breast cancer (ductal carcinoma, lobular carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, and inflammatory breast cancer), Paget's disease of the nipple or Cystosarcoma phyllodes.
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following uro logical tissues: co ⁇ us cavernosum, kidney, kidney tumor.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue kidney tumor and healthy tissue kidney demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of urological disorders. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone- releasing hormone can be modulated to treat urological disorders.
  • Genitourological disorders comprise benign and malign disorders of the organs constituting the genitourological system of female and male, renal diseases like acute or chronic renal failure, immunologically mediated renal diseases like renal transplant rejection, lupus nephritis, immune complex renal diseases, glomerulopathies, nephritis, toxic nephropathy, obstructive uropathies like benign prostatic hype ⁇ lasia (BPH), neurogenic bladder syndrome, urinary incontinence like urge-, stress-, or overflow incontinence, pelvic pain, and erectile dysfunction.
  • renal diseases like acute or chronic renal failure
  • immunologically mediated renal diseases like renal transplant rejection, lupus nephritis, immune complex renal diseases, glomerulopathies, nephritis, toxic nephropathy, obstructive uropathies like benign prostatic hype ⁇ lasia (BPH)
  • BPH benign prostatic hype ⁇ lasia
  • neurogenic bladder syndrome urinary incontinence like urge
  • This invention further pertains to the use of novel agents identified by the screening assays described above. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to use a test compound identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model.
  • an agent identified as described herein e.g., a modulating agent, an antisense nucleic acid molecule, a specific antibody, ribozyme, or a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide binding molecule
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent.
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent.
  • this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
  • a reagent which affects growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor activity can be administered to a human cell, either in vitro or in vivo, to reduce growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor activity.
  • the reagent preferably binds to an expression product of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene. If the expression product is a protein, the reagent is preferably an antibody.
  • an antibody can be added to a preparation of stem cells that have been removed from the body. The cells can then be replaced in the same or another human body, with or without clonal propagation, as is known in the art.
  • the reagent is delivered using a liposome.
  • the liposome is stable in the animal into which it has been administered for at least about 30 minutes, more preferably for at least about 1 hour, and even more preferably for at least about 24 hours.
  • a liposome comprises a lipid composition that is capable of targeting a reagent, particularly a polynucleotide, to a particular site in an animal, such as a human.
  • the lipid composition of the liposome is capable of targeting to a specific organ of an animal, such as the lung, liver, spleen, heart brain, lymph nodes, and skin.
  • a liposome useful in the present invention comprises a lipid composition that is capable of fusing with the plasma membrane of the targeted cell to deliver its contents to the cell.
  • the transfection efficiency of a liposome is about 0.5 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 10 6 cells, more preferably about 1.0 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 10 6 cells, and even more preferably about 2.0 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 10 6 cells.
  • a liposome is between about 100 and 500 nm, more preferably between about 150 and 450 nm, and even more preferably between about 200 and 400 nm in diameter.
  • Suitable liposomes for use in the present invention include those liposomes standardly used in, for example, gene delivery methods known to those of skill in the art. More preferred liposomes include liposomes having a polycationic lipid composition and/or liposomes having a cholesterol backbone conjugated to polyethylene glycol.
  • a liposome comprises a compound capable of targeting the liposome to a particular cell type, such as a cell-specific ligand exposed on the outer surface of the liposome.
  • a liposome with a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme can be achieved using methods that are standard in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent 5,705,151).
  • a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme
  • from about 0.1 ⁇ g to about 10 ⁇ g of polynucleotide is combined with about 8 nmol of liposomes, more preferably from about 0.5 ⁇ g to about 5 ⁇ g of polynucleotides are combined with about 8 nmol liposomes, and even more preferably about 1.0 ⁇ g of polynucleotides is combined with about 8 nmol liposomes.
  • antibodies can be delivered to specific tissues in vivo using receptor-mediated targeted delivery.
  • Receptor-mediated DNA delivery techniques are taught in, for example, Findeis et al Trends in Biotechnol. 11, 202-05 (1993); Chiou et al, GENE THERAPEUTICS: METHODS AND APPLICATIONS OF DIRECT GENE
  • a therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of active ingredient which increases or decreases functional activity relative to the functional activity which occurs in the absence of the therapeutically effective dose.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially either in cell culture assays or in animal models, usually mice, rabbits, dogs, or pigs.
  • the animal model also can be used to determine the appropriate concentration range and route of administration. Such information can then be used to determine useful doses and routes for administration in humans.
  • Therapeutic efficacy and toxicity e.g., ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population) and LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population), can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals.
  • the dose ratio of toxic to therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index, and it can be expressed as the ratio, LD 50 /ED o.
  • compositions that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred.
  • the data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies is used in formulating a range of dosage for human use.
  • the dosage contained in such compositions is preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED 50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage varies within this range depending upon the dosage form employed, sensitivity of the patient, and the route of administration.
  • Dosage and administration are adjusted to provide sufficient levels of the active ingredient or to maintain the desired effect.
  • Factors that can be taken into account include the severity of the disease state, general health of the subject, age, weight, and gender of the subject, diet, time and frequency of administration, drug combination(s), reaction sensitivities, and tolerance/response to therapy.
  • Long-acting pharmaceutical compositions can be administered every 3 to 4 days, every week, or once every two weeks depending on the half-life and clearance rate of the particular formulation.
  • Normal dosage amounts can vary from 0.1 to 100,000 micrograms, up to a total dose of about 1 g, depending upon the route of administration.
  • Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature and generally available to practitioners in the art. Those skilled in the art will employ different formulations for nucleotides than for proteins or their inhibitors. Similarly, delivery of polynucleotides or polypeptides will be specific to particular cells, conditions, locations, etc.
  • polynucleotides encoding the antibody can be constructed and introduced into a cell either ex vivo or in vivo using well- established techniques including, but not limited to, transferrin-polycation-mediated DNA transfer, transfection with naked or encapsulated nucleic acids, liposome- mediated cellular fusion, intracellular transportation of DNA-coated latex beads, protoplast fusion, viral infection, electroporation, "gene gun,” and DEAE- or calcium phosphate-mediated transfection.
  • Effective in vivo dosages of an antibody are in the range of about 5 ⁇ g to about 50 ⁇ g/kg, about 50 ⁇ g to about 5 mg/kg, about 100 ⁇ g to about 500 ⁇ g/kg of patient body weight, and about 200 to about 250 ⁇ g/kg of patient body weight.
  • effective in vivo dosages are in the range of about 100 ng to about 200 ng, 500 ng to about 50 mg, about 1 ⁇ g to about 2 mg, about 5 ⁇ g to about 500 ⁇ g, and about 20 ⁇ g to about 100 ⁇ g of DNA.
  • the reagent is preferably an antisense oligonucleotide or a ribozyme.
  • Polynucleotides that express antisense oligonucleotides or ribozymes can be introduced into cells by a variety of methods, as described above.
  • a reagent reduces expression of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene or the activity of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100%) relative to the absence of the reagent.
  • the effectiveness of the mechanism chosen to decrease the level of expression of a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor gene or the activity of a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be assessed using methods well known in the art, such as hybridization of nucleotide probes to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-specific mRNA, quantitative RT-PCR, immunologic detection of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, or measurement of functional activity.
  • any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in combination with other appropriate therapeutic agents.
  • Selection of the appropriate agents for use in combination therapy can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art, according to conventional pharmaceutical principles.
  • the combination of therapeutic agents can act synergistically to effect the treatment or prevention of the various disorders described above. Using this approach, one may be able to achieve therapeutic efficacy with lower dosages of each agent, thus reducing the potential for adverse side effects.
  • any of the therapeutic methods described above can be applied to any subject in need of such therapy, including, for example, mammals such as dogs, cats, cows, horses, rabbits, monkeys, and most preferably, humans.
  • Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor also can be used in diagnostic assays for detecting diseases and abnormalities or susceptibility to diseases and abnormalities related to the presence of mutations in the nucleic acid sequences that encode the protein. For example, differences can be determined between the cDNA or genomic sequence encoding growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor in individuals afflicted with a disease and in normal individuals. If a mutation is observed in some or all of the afflicted individuals but not in normal individuals, then the mutation is likely to be the causative agent of the disease.
  • Sequence differences between a reference gene and a gene having mutations can be revealed by the direct DNA sequencing method.
  • cloned DNA segments can be employed as probes to detect specific DNA segments.
  • the sensitivity of this method is greatly enhanced when combined with PCR.
  • a sequencing primer can be used with a double-stranded PCR product or a single-stranded template molecule generated by a modified PCR.
  • the sequence determination is performed by conventional procedures using radiolabeled nucleotides or by automatic sequencing procedures using fluorescent tags. Genetic testing based on DNA sequence differences can be carried out by detection of alteration in electrophoretic mobility of DNA fragments in gels with or without denaturing agents. Small sequence deletions and insertions can be visualized, for example, by high resolution gel electrophoresis.
  • DNA fragments of different sequences can be distinguished on denaturing formamide gradient gels in which the mobilities of different DNA fragments are retarded in the gel at different positions according to their specific melting or partial melting temperatures (see, e.g., Myers et al, Science 230, 1242, 1985). Sequence changes at specific locations can also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and S 1 protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g., Cotton et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85, 4397-4401, 1985).
  • the detection of a specific DNA sequence can be performed by methods such as hybridization, RNase protection, chemical cleavage, direct DNA sequencing or the use of restriction enzymes and Southern blotting of genomic DNA.
  • direct methods such as gel-electrophoresis and DNA sequencing, mutations can also be detected by in situ analysis.
  • Altered levels of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor also can be detected in various tissues.
  • Assays used to detect levels of the receptor polypeptides in a body sample, such as blood or a tissue biopsy, derived from a host are well known to those of skill in the art and include radioimmunoassays, competitive binding assays, Western blot analysis, and ELISA assays.
  • the polynucleotide of SEQ ID NO: 3 is inserted into the expression vector pCEV4 and the expression vector pCEV4 GPCR polypeptide obtained is transfected into human embryonic kidney 293 cells.
  • the cells are scraped from a culture flask into 5 ml of Tris HC1, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication. Cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 ⁇ m for 5 minutes at 4°C. The supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 minutes at 4°C.
  • the pellet is suspended in binding buffer containing 50 mM Tris HC1, 5 mM MgSO 4 , 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl, pH 7.5, supplemented with 0.1% BSA, 2 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 mg/ml phosphoramidon.
  • Optimal membrane suspension dilutions defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10%> of an added radioligand are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing ligand, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 ml.
  • membrane preparations are incubated in the presence of increasing concentrations (0.1 nM to 4 nM) of 125 I ligand.
  • Binding reaction mixtures are incubated for one hour at 30°C. The reaction is stopped by filtration through GF/B filters treated with 0.5% polyethyleneimine, using a cell harvester. Radioactivity is measured by scintillation counting, and data are analyzed by a computerized non-linear regression program. Non-specific binding is defined as the amount of radioactivity remaining after incubation of membrane protein in the presence of 100 nM of unlabeled peptide. Protein concentration is measured by the Bradford method using Bio-Rad Reagent, with bovine serum albumin as a standard. The GPCR activity of the polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ LO NO: 2 is demonstrated. EXAMPLE 2
  • RNA prepared by the Tri-reagent protocol was treated with DNAse I to remove genomic DNA contamination.
  • RNA from each cell or tissue source was first reverse transcribed. 85 ⁇ g of total RNA was reverse transcribed using 1 ⁇ mole random hexamer primers, 0.5 mM each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP and dTTP (Qiagen, Hilden,
  • Applied Biosystems 7900HT Sequence Detection system was used according to the manufacturer's specifications and protocols. PCR reactions were set up to quantitate the human growth hormone- releasing hormone and the housekeeping genes HPRT (hypoxanthine phosphoribo- syltransferase), GAPDH (glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase), ⁇ -actin, and others. Forward and reverse primers and probes for the human growth hormone- releasing hormone were designed using the Perkin Elmer ABI Primer ExpressTM software and were synthesized by TibMolBiol (Berlin, Germany).
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone forward primer sequence was: Primerl (SEQ ID NO: 7).
  • the human growth hormone-releasing hormone reverse primer sequence was Primer2 (SEQ ID NO: 8).
  • Probel SEQ ID NO: 9
  • FAM carboxy- fluorescein succinimidyl ester
  • TAMRA carboxytetra- methylrhodamine
  • the following reagents were prepared in a total of 25 ⁇ l : lx TaqMan buffer A, 5.5 mM MgCl 2 , 200 nM of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dUTP, 0.025 U/ ⁇ l AmpliTaq Gold TM, 0.01 U/ ⁇ l AmpErase and Probel (SEQ ID NO: 4), human growth hormone-releasing hormone forward and reverse primers each at 200 nM, human growth hormone-releasing hormone FAM/TAMRA-labelled probe, and 5 ⁇ l of template cDNA.
  • Thermal cycling parameters were 2 min at 50°C, followed by 10 min at 95 °C, followed by 40 cycles of melting at 95 °C for 15 sec and annealing/extending at 60°C for 1 min.
  • the CT (threshold cycle) value is calculated as described in the "Quantitative determination of nucleic acids" section.
  • the CF-value (factor for threshold cycle correction) is calculated as follows:
  • PCR reactions were set up to quantitate the housekeeping genes (HKG) for each cDNA sample.
  • CT HKG - values were calculated as described in the "Quantitative determination of nucleic acids" section.
  • CT H ⁇ G-n-mean value (CTHKGI -value + CT H ⁇ G 2-value + ... + CT HKG - ⁇ - value) / n
  • CTp ann ei mean value (CT mean value ofall HKG in all tested cDNAs)
  • CT C DN A -n CT value of the tested gene for the cDNA n
  • CF C DNA- ⁇ correction factor for cDNA n
  • CT CO ⁇ - C DNA- ⁇ corrected CT value for a gene on cDNA n
  • fetal heart heart, pericardium, heart atrium (right), heart atrium (left), heart ventricle
  • interventricular septum fetal aorta, aorta, artery, coronary artery, vein, coronary artery smooth muscle primary cells, HUVEC cells, skin, adrenal gland, thyroid, thyroid tumor, pancreas, pancreas liver cirrhosis, esophagus, esophagus tumor, stomach, stomach tumor, colon, colon tumor, small intestine, ileum, ileum tumor, ileum chronic inflammation, rectum, salivary gland, fetal liver, liver, liver liver cirrhosis, liver tumor, HEP G2 cells, leukocytes (peripheral blood), Jurkat (T-cells), bone marrow, erythrocytes, lymphnode, thymus, thrombocytes, bone marrow CD71 + cells, bone marrow CD34 + cells, bone marrow CD15 + cells, cord blood CD71 + cells, spleen, spleen liver cirrhosis, skeletal muscle, ad
  • IMR32 cells retina, fetal lung, fetal lung fibroblast IMR-90 cells, lung, lung tumor, lung COPD, trachea, cervix, testis, HeLa cells (cervix tumor), placenta, uterus, uterus tumor, ovary tumor, breast, breast tumor, MDA MB 231 cells (breast tumor), mammary gland, prostata, prostate BPH, bladder, penis, co ⁇ us cavernosum, fetal kidney, kidney, kidney tumor, HEK 293 cells
  • the Pichia pastoris expression vector pPICZB (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) is used to produce large quantities of recombinant human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides in yeast.
  • the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-encoding DNA sequence is derived from SEQ ID NO: 1. Before insertion into vector pPICZB, the DNA sequence is modified by well known methods in such a way that it contains at its 5 '-end an initiation codon and at its 3 '-end an enterokinase cleavage site, a His6 reporter tag and a termination codon.
  • This expression vector is designed for inducible expression in Pichia pastoris, driven by a yeast promoter.
  • the resulting pPICZ/md-His6 vector is used to transform the yeast.
  • the yeast is cultivated under usual conditions in 5 liter shake flasks and the recombinantly produced protein isolated from the culture by affinity chromatography (Ni-NTA-Resin) in the presence of 8 M urea.
  • the bound polypeptide is eluted with buffer, pH 3.5, and neutralized. Separation of the polypeptide from the His6 reporter tag is accomplished by site-specific proteolysis using enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) according to manufacturer's instructions. Purified human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is obtained.
  • Purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides comprising a glutathione-S-transferase protein and absorbed onto glutathione-derivatized wells of 96-well microtiter plates are contacted with test compounds from a small molecule library at pH 7.0 in a physiological buffer solution.
  • Human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides comprise the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
  • the test compounds comprise a fluorescent tag. The samples are incubated for 5 minutes to one hour. Control samples are incubated in the absence of a test compound.
  • the buffer solution containing the test compounds is washed from the wells. Binding of a test compound to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is detected by fluorescence measurements of the contents of the wells. A test compound that increases the fluorescence in a well by at least 15% relative to fluorescence of a well in which a test compound is not incubated is identified as a compound which binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • test compound is administered to a culture of human cells transfected with a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor expression construct and incubated at 37°C for 10 to 45 minutes.
  • a culture of the same type of cells that have not been transfected is incubated for the same time without the test compound to provide a negative control.
  • RNA is isolated from the two cultures as described in Chirgwin et al, Biochem. 18, 5294-99, 1979).
  • Northern blots are prepared using 20 to 30 ⁇ g total RNA and hybridized with a 32 P-labeled growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-specific probe at 65°C in Express-hyb (CLONTECH).
  • the probe comprises at least 11 contiguous nucleotides selected from the complement of SEQ ID NO: 1.
  • a test compound that decreases the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-specific signal relative to the signal obtained in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene expression.
  • RT-PCR Reverse Transcription-Polymerase Chain Reaction
  • the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression: subcutaneous and mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone marrow, brain, colon, fetal brain, heart, hypothalamus, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, thyroid, trachea, and uterus. Human islet cells and an islet cell library also are tested. As a final step, the expression of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from diabetic individuals is compared.
  • subcutaneous adipose tissue subcutaneous adipose tissue, mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone marrow, brain (cerebellum, spinal cord, cerebral cortex, caudate, medulla, substantia nigra, and putamen), colon, fetal brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle small intestine, spleen, stomach, testes, thymus, thyroid trachea, and uterus.
  • tissues subcutaneous adipose tissue, mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone marrow, brain (cerebellum, spinal cord, cerebral cortex, caudate, medulla, substantia nigra, and putamen), colon, fetal brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle
  • Quantitative expression profiling is performed by the form of quantitative PCR analysis called "kinetic analysis” firstly described in Higuchi et al, BioTechnology 10, 413-17, 1992, and Higuchi et al, BioTechnology 11, 1026-30, 1993.
  • the principle is that at any given cycle within the exponential phase of PCR, the amount of product is proportional to the initial number of template copies.
  • the probe is cleaved by the 5 '-3' endonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase and a fluorescent dye released in the medium (Holland et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 7276-80, 1991). Because the fluorescence emission will increase in direct proportion to the amount of the specific amplified product, the exponential growth phase of PCR product can be detected and used to determine the initial template concentration (Heid et al, Genome Res. 6, 986-94, 1996, and Gibson et al, Genome
  • the amplification of an endogenous control can be performed to standardize the amount of sample RNA added to a reaction.
  • the control of choice is the 18S ribosomal RNA. Because reporter dyes with differing emission spectra are available, the target and the endogenous control can be independently quantified in the same tube if probes labeled with different dyes are used. All "real time PCR" measurements of fluorescence are made in the ABI Prism 7700.
  • RNA extraction and cDNA preparation Total RNA from the tissues listed above are used for expression quantification. RNAs labeled "from autopsy” were extracted from autoptic tissues with the TRIzol reagent (Life Technologies, MD) according to the manufacturer's protocol.
  • RNA Fifty ⁇ g of each RNA were treated with DNase I for 1 hour at 37°C in the following reaction mix: 0.2 U/ ⁇ l RNase-free DNase I (Roche Diagnostics, Germany); 0.4 U/ ⁇ l
  • RNase inhibitor PE Applied Biosystems, CA
  • 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.9 10 mM MgCl 2 ; 50 mM NaCl; and 1 mM DTT.
  • RNA is extracted once with 1 volume of phenolxhloroform:- isoamyl alcohol (24:24:1) and once with chloroform, and precipitated with 1/10 volume of 3 M sodium acetate, pH 5.2, and 2 volumes of ethanol.
  • each sample is reverse transcribed with the TaqMan
  • RNA in the reaction mix is 200 ng/ ⁇ l. Reverse transcription is carried out with 2.5 ⁇ M of random hexamer primers.
  • TaqMan quantitative analysis Specific primers and probe are designed according to the recommendations of PE Applied Biosystems; the probe can be labeled at the 5' end FAM (6-carboxy-fluorescein) and at the 3' end with TAMRA (6-carboxy- tetramethyl-rhodamine). Quantification experiments are performed on 10 ng of reverse transcribed RNA from each sample. Each determination is done in triplicate.
  • FAM 6-carboxy-fluorescein
  • TAMRA 6-carboxy- tetramethyl-rhodamine
  • Total cDNA content is normalized with the simultaneous quantification (multiplex PCR) of the 18S ribosomal RNA using the Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Reagents (PDAR) Control Kit (PE Applied Biosystems, CA).
  • PDAR Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Reagents
  • the assay reaction mix is as follows: IX final TaqMan Universal PCR Master Mix (from 2 X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from 20 X stock); 300 nM forward primer; 900 nM reverse primer; 200 nM probe; 10 ng cDNA; and water to 25 ⁇ l.
  • the experiment is performed on an ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detector (PE Applied Biosystems, CA).
  • fluorescence data acquired during PCR are processed as described in the ABI Prism 7700 user's manual in order to achieve better background subtraction as well as signal linearity with the starting target quantity.
  • Human embryonic kidney 293 cells transfected with a polynucleotide which expresses human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor are scraped from a culture flask into 5 ml of Tris HC1, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication.
  • Cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 ⁇ m for 5 minutes at 4°C.
  • the supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 minutes at 4°C.
  • the pellet is suspended in binding buffer containing 50 mM Tris HC1, 5 mM MgSO 4 , 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl, pH 7.5, supplemented with 0.1% BSA, 2 ⁇ g/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 ⁇ g/ml phosphoramidon.
  • Optimal membrane suspension dilutions defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10% of the added radioligand, are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing 125 I-labeled ligand or test compound, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 ⁇ l.
  • membrane preparations are incubated in the presence of increasing concentrations (0.1 nM to 4 nM) of 125 I-labeled ligand or test compound (specific activity 2200 Ci/mmol).
  • the binding affinities of different test compounds are determined in equilibrium competition binding assays, using 0.1 nM 125 I-peptide in the presence of twelve different concentrations of each test compound.
  • Binding reaction mixtures are incubated for one hour at 30°C.
  • the reaction is stopped by filtration through GF/B filters treated with 0.5% polyethyleneimine, using a cell harvester. Radioactivity is measured by scintillation counting, and data are analyzed by a computerized non-linear regression program.
  • Non-specific binding is defined as the amount of radioactivity remaining after incubation of membrane protein in the presence of 100 nM of unlabeled peptide.
  • test compound which increases the radioactivity of membrane protein by at least 15% relative to radioactivity of membrane protein which was not incubated with a test compound is identified as a compound which binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
  • Receptor-mediated inhibition of cAMP formation can be assayed in host cells which express human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
  • Cells are plated in 96- well plates and incubated in Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline (PBS) supplemented with lO mM HEPES, 5 mM theophylline, 2 ⁇ g/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 ⁇ g/ml phosphoramidon for 20 minutes at 37°C in 5% CO 2 .
  • a test compound is added and incubated for an additional 10 minutes at 37°C.
  • the medium is aspirated, and the reaction is stopped by the addition of 100 mM HC1.
  • cAMP content in the stopping solution is measured by radioimmunoassay. Radioactivity is quantified using a gamma counter equipped with data reduction software.
  • a test compound which decreases radioactivity of the contents of a well relative to radioactivity of the contents of a well in the absence of the test compound is identified as a potential inhibitor of cAMP formation.
  • a test compound which increases radioactivity of the contents of a well relative to radioactivity of the contents of a well in the absence of the test compound is identified as a potential enhancer of cAMP formation.
  • Intracellular free calcium concentration can be measured by microspecfrofluorometry using the fluorescent indicator dye Fura-2/AM (Bush et al., J. Neurochem. 57, 562- 74, 1991).
  • Stably transfected cells are seeded onto a 35 mm culture dish containing a glass coverslip insert. Cells are washed with HBS , incubated with a test compound, and loaded with 100 ⁇ l of Fura-2/AM (10 ⁇ M) for 20-40 minutes. After washing with HBS to remove the Fura-2/AM solution, cells are equilibrated in HBS for 10- 20 minutes. Cells are then visualized under the 40X objective of a Leitz Fluovert FS microscope.
  • Fluorescence emission is determined at 510 nM, with excitation wavelengths alternating between 340 nM and 380 nM.
  • Raw fluorescence data are converted to calcium concentrations using standard calcium concentration curves and software analysis techniques.
  • Cells which stably express human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor cDNA are plated in 96-well plates and grown to confluence.
  • the growth medium is changed to 100 ⁇ l of medium containing 1%> serum and 0.5 ⁇ Ci 3 H-myinositol.
  • the plates are incubated overnight in a CO 2 incubator (5% CO 2 at 37°C).
  • the medium is removed and replaced by 200 ⁇ l of PBS containing 10 mM LiCl, and the cells are equilibrated with the new medium for 20 minutes. During this interval, cells also are equilibrated with antagonist, added as a 10 ⁇ l aliquot of a 20-fold concentrated solution in PBS.
  • the 3 H-inositol phosphate accumulation from inositol phospholipid metabolism is started by adding 10 ⁇ ml of a solution containing a test compound. To the first well
  • test compound 10 ⁇ l are added to measure basal accumulation. Eleven different concentrations of test compound are assayed in the following 11 wells of each plate row. All assays are performed in duplicate by repeating the same additions in two consecutive plate rows.
  • the plates are incubated in a CO 2 incubator for one hour.
  • the reaction is terminated by adding 15 ⁇ l of 50% v/v trichloroacetic acid (TCA), followed by a 40 minute incubation at 4°C.
  • TCA 50% v/v trichloroacetic acid
  • the content of the wells is transferred to a Multiscreen HV filter plate (Millipore) containing Dowex AG1-X8 (200-400 mesh, formate form).
  • the filter plates are prepared by adding
  • Binding assays are carried out in a binding buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 0.5% BSA, and 5 mM MgCl 2 .
  • the standard assay for radioligand binding to membrane fragments comprising growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides is carried out as follows in 96 well microtiter plates (e.g., Dynatech Immulon II Removawell plates). Radioligand is diluted in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci to the desired cpm per 50 ⁇ l, then 50 ⁇ l aliquots are added to the wells. For non-specific binding samples, 5 ⁇ l of 40 ⁇ M cold ligand also is added per well.
  • Binding is initiated by adding 150 ⁇ l per well of membrane diluted to the desired concentration (10-30 ⁇ g membrane protein/well) in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci. Plates are then covered with Linbro mylar plate sealers (Flow Labs) and placed on a Dynatech Microshaker II. Binding is allowed to proceed at room temperature for 1-2 hours and is stopped by centrifuging the plate for 15 minutes at 2,000 x g. The supernatants are decanted, and the membrane pellets are washed once by addition of 200 ⁇ l of ice cold binding buffer, brief shaking, and recentrifugation. The individual wells are placed in 12 x 75 mm tubes and counted in an LKB Gammamaster counter (78% efficiency). Specific binding by this method is identical to that measured when free ligand is removed by rapid
  • binding assays to obtain membrane pellets for studies on solubilization of recepto ⁇ ligand complex and for receptor purification are also carried out. These are identical to the standard assays except that (a) binding is carried out in polypropylene tubes in volumes from 1-250 ml, (b) concentration of membrane protein is always 0.5 mg/ml, and (c) for receptor purification, BSA concentration in the binding buffer is reduced to 0.25%>, and the wash step is done with binding buffer without BSA, which reduces BSA contamination of the purified receptor.
  • Membrane solubilization is carried out in buffer containing 25 mM Tris, pH 8, 10%> glycerol (w/v) and 0.2 mM CaCl 2 (solubilization buffer).
  • the highly soluble detergents including Triton X-100, deoxycholate, deoxycholate:lyso lecithin, CHAPS, and zwittergent are made up in solubilization buffer at 10% concentrations and stored as frozen aliquots. Lysolecithin is made up fresh because of insolubility upon freeze-thawing and digitonin is made fresh at lower concentrations due to its more limited solubility.
  • washed pellets after the binding step are resuspended free of visible particles by pipetting and vortexing in solubilization buffer at 100,000 x g for 30 minutes.
  • solubilization buffer at 100,000 x g for 30 minutes.
  • the supematants are removed and held on ice and the pellets are discarded.
  • the intact R:L complex can be assayed by four different methods. All are carried out on ice or in a cold room at 4-10°C).
  • Sephadex G-50 columns (8 x 250 mm) are equilibrated with solubilization buffer containing detergent at the concentration used to solubilize membranes and 1 mg/ml bovine serum albumin.
  • Samples of solubilized membranes (0.2- 0.5 ml) are applied to the columns and eluted at a flow rate of about 0.7 ml/minute. Samples (0.18 ml) are collected. Radioactivity is determined in a gamma counter. Void volumes of the columns are determined by the elution volume of blue dextran. Radioactivity eluting in the void volume is considered bound to protein. Radioactivity eluting later, at the same volume as free 125 I ligands, is considered non-bound.
  • R:L complex 10 minutes at room temperature and then stored at 4°C. until use.
  • 4 parts by volume of charcoal/dextran suspension are added to 1 part by volume of solubilized membrane.
  • the samples are mixed and held on ice for 2 minutes and then centrifuged for 2 minutes at 11,000 x g in a Beckman microfuge. Free radioligand is adsorbed charcoal/dextran and is discarded with the pellet.
  • Receptor 125 I-ligand complexes remain in the supernatant and are determined by gamma counting.
  • Binding of biotinyl-receptor to GH CI membranes is carried out as described above. Incubations are for 1 hour at room temperature. In the standard purification protocol, the binding incubations contain 10 nM Bio-S29. I ligand is added as a tracer at levels of 5,000-100,000 cpm per mg of membrane protein. Control incubations contain 10 ⁇ M cold ligand to saturate the receptor with non-biotinylated ligand.
  • Solubilization of receptor:ligand complex also is carried out as described above, with 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin in solubilization buffer containing 0.2 mM MgCl 2 , to obtain 100,000 x g supematants containing solubilized R:L complex.
  • Immobilized streptavidin (streptavidin cross-linked to 6%> beaded agarose, Pierce Chemical Co.; "SA-agarose”) is washed in solubilization buffer and added to the solubilized membranes as 1/30 of the final volume. This mixture is incubated with constant stirring by end-over-end rotation for 4-5 hours at 4-10°C. Then the mixture is applied to a column and the non-bound material is washed through. Binding of radioligand to SA-agarose is determined by comparing cpm in the 100,000 x g supernatant with that in the column effluent after adso ⁇ tion to SA-agarose.
  • Eluates from the streptavidin column are incubated overnight (12-15 hours) with immobilized wheat germ agglutinin (WGA agarose, Vector Labs) to adsorb the receptor via interaction of covalently bound carbohydrate with the WGA lectin.
  • the ratio (vol/vol) of WGA-agarose to streptavidin column eluate is generally 1 :400. A range from 1:1000 to 1 :200 also can be used.
  • the resin is pelleted by centrifugation, the supernatant is removed and saved, and the resin is washed 3 times (about 2 minutes each) in buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 8,
  • the resin is extracted three times by repeated mixing (vortex mixer on low speed) over a 15-30 minute period on ice, with 3 resin columns each time, of 10 mM N-N'-N"-triacetylchitotriose in the same HEPES buffer used to wash the resin. After each elution step, the resin is centrifuged down and the supernatant is carefully removed, free of WGA-agarose pellets. The three, pooled eluates contain the final, purified receptor.
  • the material non-bound to WGA contain G protein subunits specifically eluted from the streptavidin column, as well as non-specific contaminants. All these fractions are stored frozen at -90°C.
  • Overnight fasted normal rats or mice have elevated rates of gluconeogenesis as do streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats or mice fed ad libitum.
  • Rats are made diabetic with a single intravenous injection of 40 mg/kg of streptozotocin while C57BL/KsJ mice are given 40- 60 mg/kg i.p. for 5 consecutive days.
  • Blood glucose is measured from tail-tip blood and then compounds are administered via different routes (p.o., i.p., i.v., s.c). Blood is collected at various times thereafter and glucose measured. Alternatively, compounds are administered for several days, then the animals are fasted overnight, blood is collected and plasma glucose measured. Compounds that inhibit glucose production will decrease plasma glucose levels compared to the vehicle-treated control group.
  • Both ob/ob and db/db mice as well as diabetic Zucker rats are hyperglycemic, hyperinsulinemic and insulin resistant.
  • the animals are pre-bled, their glucose levels measured, and then they are grouped so that the mean glucose level is the same for each group.
  • Compounds are administered daily either q.d. or b.i.d. by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c.) for 7-28 days. Blood is collected at various times and plasma glucose and insulin levels determined. Compounds that improve insulin sensitivity in these models will decrease both plasma glucose and insulin levels when compared to the vehicle-treated control group.
  • Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load.
  • compounds are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c. or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice.
  • an intravenous glucose load (0.4 g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later.
  • Plasma insulin levels are determined.
  • Compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose.
  • animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or intraperitoneal glucose load (1 g/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60 and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined.
  • Compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
  • test compounds which regulate growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c, or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice.
  • routes p.o., i.p., s.c, or i.v.
  • Plasma insulin levels are determined.
  • Test compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose.
  • mice When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or intraperitoneal glucose load (1 g/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60, and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Test compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
  • the pu ⁇ ose of this protocol is to determine the effect of chronic administration of an unknown compound on body weight and food and water consumption in obese Zucker fa fa rats.
  • Obese Zucker fa/fa rats are frequently used in the determination of compound efficacy in the reduction of body weight.
  • This animal model has been successfully used in the identification and characterization of the efficacy profile of compounds that are or have been used in the management of body weight in obese humans 1 ' 2 > 3> 4 & 5 .
  • Rats are single housed in large rat shoeboxes containing grid floor. Animals are adapted to the grid floors and sham dosed with study vehicle for at least four days before the recording of two-days baseline measurement of body weight and 24 hr food and water consumption. Rats are assigned to one of 6-8 treatment groups based upon their body weight on baseline. The groups are set up so that the mean and standard error of the mean of body weight were similar.
  • Animals are orally gavaged (2 ml/kg) daily before the dark phase of the LD/cycle for a pre-determined number of days (typically 8-14 days) with their assigned dose/compound. At this time, body weight, food and water consumption are measured. On the final day, animals are euthanized using CO 2 inhalation.
  • the pu ⁇ ose of this protocol is to determine the effect of chronic administration of an unknown compound on body weight of mice made obese by exposure to a 45%> kcal/g high fat diet during more than 10 weeks.
  • the body weight of mice selected for the studies is higher than three standard deviations from the weight of a control group of mice fed standard low fat (5-6%> fat) mouse chow.
  • Diet-induced obese (DIO) animals are frequently used in the determination of compound efficacy in the reduction of body weight 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 .
  • This animal model has been successfully used in the identification and characterization of the efficacy profile of compounds that are or have been used in the management of body weight in obese humans 1 ' 2 ' 3 .
  • Animals are orally gavaged (5ml/kg) daily before the dark phase of the LD/cycle for a pre-determined number of days (typically 8-14 days) with their assigned dose/compound. At this time, body weight, food and water consumption are measured. Data is analyzed using appropriate statistics following the research design. On the final day, animals are euthanized using CO 2 inhalation.
  • Diazoxide restores beta-3 adrenergic receptor function in diet-induced obesity and diabetes. Endocrinology, 141 (10), 3630-7.
  • the pu ⁇ ose of this protocol is to determine the effect of a single dose of an unknown compound on food consumption of lean overnight fasted rats.
  • the fasted-refed rat model is frequently used in the field of obesity to identify compounds with potential for anorectic effects.
  • This animal model has been successfully used in the identification and characterization of the efficacy profile of compounds that are or have been used in the management of body weight in obese humans 1 ' 2 ' 3 & 4 .
  • the efficacy test The rats are fasted overnight during the dark phase (total of approx.
  • the animal is dosed orally with his assigned treatment (2 mg/ml).
  • his assigned treatment (2 mg/ml).
  • One hour after dosing pre-weighed food jars are returned to the cage. Food intake is recorded 30, 60, 90, 180, 240 minutes post food return. At each time point, spillage is returned to the food jar and then the food jars are weighed. The amount of food consumed is determined for each time point. Difference between treatment group is determined using appropriate statistical analysis.
  • This non-tumor assay measures the ability of a compound to reduce either the endogenous level of a circulating hormone or the level of hormone produced in response to a biologic stimulus.
  • Rodents are administered test compound (p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c).
  • test compound p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c
  • Plasma is assayed for levels of the hormone of interest. If the normal circulating levels of the hormone are too low and/or variable to provide consistent results, the level of the hormone may be elevated by a pre-treatment with a biologic stimulus (i.e., LHRH may be injected i.m.
  • a biologic stimulus i.e., LHRH may be injected i.m.
  • Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents.
  • Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c.
  • Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol, these may include assays for gene expression (bDNA, PCR, or Taqman), or a specific biochemical activity (i.e., cAMP levels. Results are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group. Subacute Functional In Vivo Assays
  • Rodents are administered test compound (p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c.) according to a predetermined schedule and for a predetermined duration (i.e., 1 week).
  • animals are weighed, the target organ is excised, any fluid is expressed, and the weight of the organ is recorded.
  • Blood plasma may also be collected. Plasma may be assayed for levels of a hormone of interest or for levels of test agent.
  • Organ weights may be directly compared or they may be normalized for the body weight of the animal. Compound effects are compared to a vehicle-treated control group. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test. Significance is p value ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol.
  • Cell proliferation is determined by measuring a marker of cell number (i.e., MTT or LDH). The cell number and change in cell number from the starting inoculum are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Hydron pellets with or without growth factors or cells are implanted into a micropocket surgically created in the rodent cornea.
  • Compound administration may be systemic or local (compound mixed with growth factors in the hydron pellet).
  • Corneas are harvested at 7 days post implantation immediately following intracardiac infusion of colloidal carbon and are fixed in 10%> formalin. Readout is qualitative scoring and/or image analysis. Qualitative scores are compared by Rank Sum test.
  • Image analysis data is evaluated by measuring the area of neovascularization (in pixels) and group averages are compared by Student's t-test (2 tail). Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the growth factor or cells only group.
  • Matrigel containing cells or growth factors, is injected subcutaneously. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. Matrigel plugs are harvested at predetermined time point(s) and prepared for readout. Readout is an ELISA-based assay for hemoglobin concentration and/or histological examination (i.e. vessel count, special staining for endothelial surface markers: CD31, factor-8). Readouts are analyzed by Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an ELISA-based assay for hemoglobin concentration and/or histological examination (i.e. vessel count, special staining for endothelial surface markers: CD31, factor-8). Readouts are analyzed by Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an
  • Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously on Day 0.
  • Vehicle and/or compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting at a time, usually on Day 1, prior to the ability to measure the tumor burden.
  • Body weights and tumor measurements are recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean net body and tumor weights are calculated for each data collection day.
  • Anti- tumor efficacy may be initially determined by comparing the size of treated (T) and control (C) tumors on a given day by a Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05.
  • Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan- Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size.
  • Tumor cells are injected intraperitoneally or intracranially on Day 0.
  • Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting on Day 1. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded twice daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Morbidity/mortality data is expressed in terms of the median time of survival and the number of long- term survivors is indicated separately. Survival times are used to generate Kaplan-
  • Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously and grown to the desired size for treatment to begin. Once at the predetermined size range, mice are randomized into treatment groups. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean tumor weights of all groups over days post inoculation are graphed for comparison. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group.
  • Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay.
  • Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p value ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Tumor cells or fragments, of mammary adenocarcinoma origin are implanted directly into a surgically exposed and reflected mammary fat pad in rodents. The fat pad is placed back in its original position and the surgical site is closed. Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean tumor weights of all groups over days post inoculation are graphed for comparison. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group.
  • Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay.
  • Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p value ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ, or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells or fragments, of prostatic adenocarcinoma origin are implanted directly into a surgically exposed dorsal lobe of the prostate in rodents.
  • the prostate is externalized through an abdominal incision so that the tumor can be implanted specifically in the dorsal lobe while verifying that the implant does not enter the seminal vesicles.
  • the successfully inoculated prostate is replaced in the abdomen and the incisions through the abdomen and skin are closed.
  • Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors.
  • Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule.
  • Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected.
  • the size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope.
  • An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor.
  • Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the lungs), or measuring the target organ weight (i.e., the regional lymph nodes). The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells of pulmonary origin may be implanted intrabronchially by making an incision through the skin and exposing the trachea.
  • the trachea is pierced with the beveled end of a 25 gauge needle and the tumor cells are inoculated into the main bronchus using a flat-ended 27 gauge needle with a 90° bend.
  • Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected.
  • the size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope.
  • An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group.
  • This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the contralateral lung), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells of gastrointestinal origin may be implanted intracecally by making an abdominal incision through the skin and externalizing the intestine. Tumor cells are inoculated into the cecal wall without penetrating the lumen of the intestine using a
  • Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the liver), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells are inoculated s.c. and the tumors allowed to grow to a predetermined range for spontaneous metastasis studies to the lung or liver. These primary tumors are then excised. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule which may include the period leading up to the excision of the primary tumor to evaluate therapies directed at inhibiting the early stages of tumor metastasis. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined.
  • Survival data is used to generate Kaplan-Meier curves. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment. The mean number of visible tumor foci, as determined under a dissecting microscope, and the mean target organ weights are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment for both of these endpoints.
  • Tumor cells are injected into the tail vein, portal vein, or the left ventricle of the heart in experimental (forced) lung, liver, and bone metastasis studies, respectively.
  • Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined. Survival data is used to generate Kaplan-Meier curves. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • the mean number of visible tumor foci, as determined under a dissecting microscope, and the mean target organ weights are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group in the experiment for both endpoints.
  • Acute pain is measured on a hot plate mainly in rats.
  • Two variants of hot plate testing are used: In the classical variant animals are put on a hot surface (52 to
  • the other variant is an increasing temperature hot plate where the experimental animals are put on a surface of neutral temperature. Subsequently this surface is slowly but constantly heated until the animals begin to lick a hind paw. The temperature which is reached when hind paw licking begins is a measure for pain threshold.
  • Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • Persistent pain Persistent pain is measured with the formalin or capsaicin test, mainly in rats. A solution of 1 to 5%> formalin or 10 to 100 ⁇ g capsaicin is injected into one hind paw of the experimental animal. After formalin or capsaicin application the animals show nocifensive reactions like flinching, licking and biting of the affected paw. The number of nocifensive reactions within a time frame of up to
  • Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to formalin or capsaicin administration.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Neuropathic pain is induced by different variants of unilateral sciatic nerve injury mainly in rats. The operation is performed under anesthesia.
  • the first variant of sciatic nerve injury is produced by placing loosely constrictive ligatures around the common sciatic nerve.
  • the second variant is the tight ligation of about the half of the diameter of the common sciatic nerve.
  • a group of models is used in which tight ligations or transections are made of either the L5 and L6 spinal nerves, or the L%> spinal nerve only.
  • the fourth variant involves an axotomy of two of the three terminal branches of the sciatic nerve (tibial and common peroneal nerves) leaving the remaining sural nerve intact whereas the last variant comprises the axotomy of only the tibial branch leaving the sural and common nerves uninjured. Control animals are treated with a sham operation.
  • the nerve injured animals develop a chronic mechanical allodynia, cold allodynioa, as well as a thermal hyperalgesia.
  • Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA; Electronic von Frey System, Somedic Sales AB, H ⁇ rby, Sweden).
  • Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy), or by means of a cold plate of 5 to 10°C where the nocifensive reactions of the affected hind paw are counted as a measure of pain intensity.
  • a further test for cold induced pain is the counting of nocifensive reactions, or duration of nocifensive responses after plantar administration of acetone to the affected hind limb.
  • Chronic pain in general is assessed by registering the circadanian rhythms in activity (Surjo and Arndt, Universitat zu K ⁇ ln, Cologne, Germany), and by scoring differences in gait (foot print patterns; FOOTPRINTS program, Klapdor et al., 1997.
  • Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Inflammatory Pain Inflammatory Pain is induced mainly in rats by injection of 0.75 mg carrageenan or complete Freund's adjuvant into one hind paw. The animals develop an edema with mechanical allodynia as well as thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA,
  • Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy, Paw thermal stimulator, G. Ozaki, University of California, USA).
  • Plant Test Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy
  • Paw thermal stimulator G. Ozaki, University of California, USA
  • edema measurement two methods are being used. In the first method, the animals are sacrificed and the affected hindpaws sectioned and weighed. The second method comprises differences in paw volume by measuring water displacement in a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy).
  • Compounds are tested against uninflamed as well as vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • 6-Hydroxydopamine (6-OH-DA) Lesion. Degeneration of the dopaminergic ni- grostriatal and striatopallidal pathways is the central pathological event in Parkinson's disease. This disorder has been mimicked experimentally in rats using single/sequential unilateral stereotaxic injections of 6-OH-DA into the medium forebrain bundle (MFB).
  • MFB medium forebrain bundle
  • mice Male Wistar rats (Harlan Winkelmann, Germany), weighing 200+250 g at the beginning of the experiment, are used. The rats are maintained in a temperature- and humidity-controlled environment under a 12 h light/dark cycle with free access to food and water when not in experimental sessions. The following in vivo protocols are approved by the governmental authorities. All efforts are made to minimize animal suffering, to reduce the number of animals used, and to utilize alternatives to in vivo techniques.
  • Animals are administered pargyline on the day of surgery (Sigma, St. Louis, MO, USA; 50 mg/kg i.p.) in order to inhibit metabolism of 6-OHDA by monoamine oxidase and desmethylimipramine HC1 (Sigma; 25 mg/kg i.p.) in order to prevent uptake of 6-OHDA by noradrenergic terminals. Thirty minutes later the rats are anesthetized with sodium pentobarbital (50 mg/kg) and placed in a stereotaxic frame.
  • DA nigrostriatal pathway 4 ⁇ l of 0.01% ascorbic acid-saline containing 8 ⁇ g of 6-OHDA HBr (Sigma) are injected into the left medial fore-brain bundle at a rate of 1 ⁇ l min (2.4 mm anterior, 1.49 mm lateral, -2.7 mm ventral to Bregma and the skull surface). The needle is left in place an additional 5 min to allow diffusion to occur.
  • Stepping Test Forelimb akinesia is assessed three weeks following lesion placement using a modified stepping test protocol. In brief, the animals are held by the experimenter with one hand fixing the hindlimbs and slightly raising the hind part above the surface.
  • Balance Test Balance adjustments following postural challenge are also measured during the stepping test sessions.
  • the rats are held in the same position as described in the stepping test and, instead of being moved sideways, tilted by the experimenter towards the side of the paw touching the table. This maneuver results in loss of balance and the ability of the rats to regain balance by forelimb movements is scored on a scale ranging from 0 to 3. Score 0 is given for a normal forelimb placement. When the forelimb movement is delayed but recovery of postural balance detected, score 1 is given. Score 2 represents a clear, yet insufficient, forelimb reaction, as evidenced by muscle contraction, but lack of success in recovering balance, and score
  • test 3 is given for no reaction of movement.
  • the test is repeated three times a day on each side for three consecutive days after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing.
  • Staircase Test (Paw Reaching).
  • a modified version of the staircase test is used for evaluation of paw reaching behavior three weeks following primary and secondary lesion placement.
  • Plexiglass test boxes with a central platform and a removable staircase on each side are used.
  • the apparatus is designed such that only the paw on the same side at each staircase can be used, thus providing a measure of independent forelimb use.
  • For each test the animals are left in the test boxes for 15 min.
  • the double staircase is filled with 7 x 3 chow pellets (Precision food pellets, formula: P, purified rodent diet, size 45 mg; Sandown Scientific) on each side.
  • MPTP neuro toxin l-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine
  • DAergic mesencephalic dopaminergic
  • MPTP leads to a marked decrease in the levels of dopamine and its metabolites, and in the number of dopaminergic terminals in the striatum as well as severe loss of the tyrosine hydroxylase (TH)-immunoreactive cell bodies in the substantia nigra, pars compacta.
  • TH tyrosine hydroxylase
  • mice are perfused transcardially with 0.01 M PBS (pH 7.4) for 2 min, followed by 4% paraformaldehyde (Merck) in PBS for 15 min.
  • the brains are removed and placed in A% paraformaldehyde for 24 h at 4°C. For dehydration they are then transferred to a 20% sucrose (Merck) solution in 0.1 M PBS at 4°C until they sink.
  • the brains are frozen in methylbutan at -20°C for 2 min and stored at -70°C.
  • sledge microtome (mod. 3800-Frigocut, Leica) 25 ⁇ m sections are taken from the genu of the co ⁇ us callosum (AP 1.7 mm) to the hippocampus (AP 21.8 mm) and from AP 24.16 to AP 26.72. Forty-six sections are cut and stored in assorters in 0.25 M Tris buffer (pH 7.4) for immunohistochemistry.
  • TH free-floating tyrosine hydroxylase
  • Rotarod Test We use a modification of the procedure described by Rozas and Labandeira-Garcia (1997), with a CR-1 Rotamex system (Columbus Instruments, Columbus, OH) comprising an IBM-compatible personal computer, a CIO-24 data acquisition card, a control unit, and a four-lane rotarod unit.
  • the rotarod unit consists of a rotating spindle (diameter 7.3 cm) and individual compartments for each mouse.
  • the system software allows preprogramming of session protocols with varying rotational speeds (0-80 rpm). Infrared beams are used to detect when a mouse has fallen onto the base grid beneath the rotarod. The system logs the fall as the end of the experiment for that mouse, and the total time on the rotarod, as well as the time of the fall and all the set-up parameters, are recorded. The system also allows a weak current to be passed through the base grid, to aid training. - I l l -
  • the object recognition task has been designed to assess the effects of experimental manipulations on the cognitive performance of rodents.
  • a rat is placed in an open field, in which two identical objects are present.
  • the rats inspects both objects during the first trial of the object recognition task.
  • a second trial after a retention interval of for example 24 hours, one of the two objects used in the first trial, the 'familiar' object, and a novel object are placed in the open field.
  • the inspection time at each of the objects is registered.
  • the basic measures in the OR task is the time spent by a rat exploring the two object the second trial. Good retention is reflected by higher exploration times towards the novel than the 'familiar' object.
  • Administration of the putative cognition enhancer prior to the first trial predominantly allows assessment of the effects on acquisition, and eventually on consolidation processes.
  • Administration of the testing compound after the first trial allows to assess the effects on consolidation processes, whereas administration before the second trial allows to measure effects on retrieval processes.
  • the passive avoidance task assesses memory performance in rats and mice.
  • the inhibitory avoidance apparatus consists of a two-compartment box with a light compartment and a dark compartment. The two compartments are separated by a guillotine door that can be operated by the experimenter. A threshold of 2 cm separates the two compartments when the guillotine door is raised. When the door is open, the illumination in the dark compartment is about 2 lux. The light intensity is about 500 lux at the center of the floor of the light compartment.
  • Two habituation sessions, one shock session, and a retention session are given, separated by inter-session intervals of 24 hours.
  • the rat is allowed to explore the apparatus for 300 sec.
  • the rat is placed in the light compartment, facing the wall opposite to the guillotine door. After an accommodation period of 15 sec. the guillotine door is opened so that all parts of the apparatus can be visited freely. Rats normally avoid brightly lit areas and will enter the dark compartment within a few seconds.
  • the guillotine door between the compartments is lowered as soon as the rat has entered the dark compartment with its four paws, and a scrambled 1 mA footshock is administered for 2 sec.
  • the rat is removed from the apparatus and put back into its home cage.
  • the procedure during the retention session is identical to that of the habituation sessions.
  • the step-through latency that is the first latency of entering the dark compartment (in sec.) during the retention session is an index of the memory performance of the animal; the longer the latency to enter the dark compartment, the better the retention is.
  • the Morris water escape task measures spatial orientation learning in rodents. It is a test system that has extensively been used to investigate the effects of putative therapeutic on the cognitive functions of rats and mice.
  • the performance of an animal is assessed in a circular water tank with an escape platform that is submerged about 1 cm below the surface of the water. The escape platform is not visible for an animal swimming in the water tank.
  • Abundant extra-maze cues are provided by the furniture in the room, including desks, computer equipment, a second water tank, the presence of the experimenter, and by a radio on a shelf that is playing softly.
  • the animals receive four trials during five daily acquisition sessions.
  • a trial is started by placing an animal into the pool, facing the wall of the tank. Each of four starting positions in the quadrants north, east, south, and west is used once in a series of four trials; their order is randomized.
  • the escape platform is always in the same position.
  • a trial is terminated as soon as the animal had climbs onto the escape platform or when 90 seconds have elapsed, whichever event occurs first. The animal is allowed to stay on the platform for 30 seconds. Then it is taken from the platform and the next trial is started. If an animal did not find the platform within 90 seconds it is put on the platform by the experimenter and is allowed to stay there for 30 seconds.
  • an additional trial is given as a probe trial: the platform is removed, and the time the animal spends in the four quadrants is measured for 30 or 60 seconds.
  • the probe trial all animals start from the same start position, opposite to the quadrant where the escape platform had been positioned during acquisition.
  • rats or mice with specific brain lesions which impair cognitive functions, or animals treated with compounds such as scopolamine or MK-801, which interfere with normal learning, or aged animals which suffer from cognitive deficits, are used.
  • the T-maze spontaneous alternation task assesses the spatial memory performance in mice.
  • the start arm and the two goal arms of the T-maze are provided with guillotine doors which can be operated manually by the experimenter.
  • a mouse is put into the start arm at the beginning of training.
  • the guillotine door is closed.
  • the 'forced trial' either the left or right goal arm is blocked by lowering the guillotine door.
  • the mouse After the mouse has been released from the start arm, it will negotiate the maze, eventually enter the open goal arm, and return to the start position, where it will be confined for 5 seconds, by lowering the guillotine door.
  • the animal can choose freely between the left and right goal arm (all guillotine-doors opened) during 14 'free choice' trials. As soon a the mouse has entered one goal arm, the other one is closed.
  • the mouse eventually returns to the start arm and is free to visit whichever go alarm it wants after having been confined to the start arm for 5 seconds. After completion of 14 free choice trials in one session, the animal is removed from the maze. During training, the animal is never handled.
  • the percent alternations out of 14 trials is calculated. This percentage and the total time needed to complete the first forced trial and the subsequent 14 free choice trials (in s) is analyzed.
  • Cognitive deficits are usually induced by an injection of scopolamine, 30 min before the start of the training session. Scopolamine reduced the per-cent alternations to chance level, or below.
  • a cognition enhancer which is always administered before the training session, will at least partially, antagonize the scopolamine-induced reduction in the spontaneous alternation rate.
  • a J mice are exposed to the smoke from 2 unfiltered cigarettes per day for 6 days per week for 14 weeks. Non-smoking, age-matched animals are used as controls. Animals are orally dosed with test compound or vehicle 1 hour before and 7 hours after smoke exposure. This twice-daily dosing regime is continued throughout the smoke exposure period. On day 7 of the weekly exposure, animals are given only 1 dose of test compound and are not exposed to cigarette smoke.
  • mice After the smoke exposure period, the mice are killed, their lungs inflated with phosphate-buffered formalin via their trachea, and then the lungs and heart are removed en bloc and fixed at 4°C for 48 hours. The lungs are then prepared for paraffin wax sectioning, and 4 mm sections are cut and mounted on glass slides. Sections are then stained with haematoxylin and eosin. Mo ⁇ hometric analysis of lung sections is done by calculation of the Linear Mean Intercept (LMI) parameter using a semi-automated computer image analysis system. Each slide (1 per mouse) contains several sections originating from multiple lobes. Twelve non-overlapping areas (each area covering 1.53 x 10-3 cm ) are randomly selected for LMI analysis.
  • LMI Linear Mean Intercept
  • the 12 areas cover a minimum of two lobes per slide. Non-parenchymal components (airways, blood vessels) are excluded from the analysis to prevent artifactual error.
  • the mean intercept length is calculated for each mouse. Development of emphysema is seen as an increase in LMI.
  • the potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparison of the tobacco smoke induced increase in LMI in animals dosed with either the test compound or just the vehicle used for administration of the compound.
  • test compounds The potency of test compounds is evaluated by measuring the inhibition of elastolysis induced by human alveolar macrophages.
  • the cells are isolated from bronchoalveolar lavage samples taken from non-smokers, disease-free smokers, and smokers with COPD. Macrophage suspensions are added to test wells coated with tritiated elastin and incubated at 37°C for 3h to allow adherence of the cells. The wells are then carefully washed to remove non-adherent cells and fresh medium is added to each well. The cells are incubated at 37°C for up to 72 hours in the presence or absence of test compound. Every 24 hours the medium in each well is removed for analysis and replaced by fresh medium.
  • Radioactivity released into the medium is measured by liquid scintillation counting and the rate of elastin degradation is calculated.
  • the potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparing the rate of elastolysis measured with cells incubated in the presence or absence of the compound.
  • Guinea pigs are exposed on a single occasion to tobacco smoke for 50 minutes.
  • RNAlaterTM Animals are sacrificed between 10 minutes and 24 hour following the end of the exposure and their lungs placed in RNAlaterTM. The lung tissue is homogenised ,and total RNA was extracted using a Qiagen RNeasyTM Maxi kit. Molecular Probes RiboGreenTM RNA quantitation method is used to quantify the amount of RNA in each sample.
  • RNA is reverse transcribed, and the resultant cDNA is used in a real-time polymerase chain reaction (PCR).
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • the cDNA is added to a solution containing the sense and anti-sense primers and the 6-carboxy-tetramethyl-rhodamine labeled probe of the serine/threonine kinase gene. Cyclophilin is used as the housekeeping gene.
  • the expression of the serine/threonine kinase gene is measured using the TaqMan real-time PCR system that generates an amplification curve for each sample. From this curve a threshold cycle value is calculated: the fractional cycle number at which the amount of amplified target reaches a fixed threshold. A sample containing many copies of the serine/threonine kinase gene will reach this threshold earlier than a sample containing fewer copies.
  • the threshold is set at 0.2, and the threshold cycle Cj is calculated from the amplification curve.
  • the Cj value for the serine/threonine kinase gene is normalized using the O value for the housekeeping gene.
  • Test compounds are evaluated as follows. Animals are pre-treated with a test compound between 5 minutes and 1 hour prior to the tobacco smoke exposure and they are then sacrificed up to 3 hours after the tobacco smoke exposure has been completed. Control animals are pre-treated with the vehicle of the test compound via the route of administration chosen for the test compound. A test compound that reduces the tobacco smoke induced upregulation of serine/threonine kinase gene relative to the expression seen in vehicle treated tobacco smoke exposed animals is identified as an inhibitor of serine/threonine kinase gene expression.
  • Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized intraperitoneally with ketamine. The abdomen is opened through a midline incision and the bladder and the proximal urethra are exposed. A constant degree of urethral obstruction is produced by tying a ligature around the urethra and a catheter with an outer diameter of 1 mm.
  • the abdominal well is closed and the animals allowed to recover.
  • the rats are anesthetized with ketamine, and the ligature around the urethra is carefully removed to normalize the outlet resistance and enable repetitive micturition.
  • a polyethylene catheter is implanted in the bladder through the dome, and exteriorized at the scapular level. Animals are then allowed to recover for at least 48 hours.
  • Cytometric investigation is performed without anesthesia two days after bladder catheter implantation in control and obstructed animals.
  • the bladder catheter was connected via a T-tube to a strain gauge and a microinjection pump.
  • the conscious rats are held under partial restraint in a restraining device.
  • Warmed saline is infused into the bladder at a rate of 3 ml/hr for control and obstructed animals.
  • the rate of infusion is increased from 3 to 10 ml/hr to obtain similar interval times between micturitions in obstructed and control rats.
  • Overactivity of the obstructed bladders is assessed by measuring the cystometric parameters such as basal pressure, peak micturition pressure, threshold pressure, micturition interval, amplitude and frequency of spontaneous activity and micturition slope. Lluel et al, J. Urol. 160, 2253-57, 1998.
  • test compound is dissolved in an appropriate vehicle, such as a mixture of ethanol, Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.), and saline (1:1:8, v/v/v), is administered intravenously through the catheter.
  • an appropriate vehicle such as a mixture of ethanol, Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.), and saline (1:1:8, v/v/v
  • An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of prostate for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates).
  • Male Wistar rats (200 ⁇ 250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole prostate is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl 2 , 1.2 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 2 mM CaCl 2 , 2.5 mM NaHCO , 12 mM glucose).
  • Ventricle prostate lobes were dissected into several strips depending on the size of prostate. Prostate strips are equilibrated for 60 min in organ bath chambers before any stimulation.
  • mice Micturition parameters from cystometry are utilized to evaluate the drug candidates for micturition disorders.
  • Sprague-Dawley rats are anesthetized by intraperitoneal administration of urethane at 1.2 g/kg.
  • the abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter is implanted into the bladder through the dome.
  • the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter filled with 2 IU/ml of heparin in saline is inserted into a common iliac artery.
  • the bladder catheter is connected via T-tube to a pressure transducer and a microinjection pump.
  • Saline is infused at room temperature into the bladder at a rate of 2.4 ml/hr.
  • Intravesicular pressure is recorded continuously on a chart pen recorder. At least three reproducible micturition cycles are recorded before a test compound administration and used as baseline values.
  • the saline infusion is stopped before administrating compounds.
  • a test compound dissolved in an appropriate vehicle is intraarterially injected 2 min before another intraarterial administration of stimulant such as capsaicin.
  • An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of urinary bladder for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates).
  • Male Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole urinary bladder is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl 2 , 1.2 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 2 mM CaCl 2 , 2.5 mM NaHCO 3 , 12 mM glucose).
  • Isometric tension is recorded under an appropriate load using longitudinal strips of rat detrusor muscle. Bladder strips are equilibrated for 60 minutes before each stimulation. Contractile response to 80 mM KC1 is determined at 15 minute intervals until reproducible responses are obtained. The response to KC1 is used as an internal standard to evaluate the effect of test compounds.
  • test compounds are investigated by incubating the strips with compounds for 30 minutes prior to stimulation with an appropriate agonist or electrical stimulation.
  • One of the preparations made from the same animal serves as a control, while others are used for evaluating test compounds.
  • the ratio of each contraction to the internal standard e.g., a KCl-induced contraction
  • Rats are anesthetized by intraperitoneal administration of urethane (Sigma) at 1.25 g/kg.
  • the abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) is implanted into the bladder through the dome.
  • a polyethylene catheter BECTON DICKINSON, PE50
  • saline Otsuka
  • Rats are anesthetized by intramuscular administration of ketamine (75 mg/kg) and xylazine (15 mg/kg). The abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON
  • DICKINSON, PE50 is implanted into the bladder through the dome.
  • the catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle (14G) to neck.
  • the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) filled with saline (Otsuka) is inserted into a femoral vein.
  • the catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle to neck.
  • the bladder catheter is connected via T-tube to a pressure transducer (Viggo-Spectramed Pte Ltd, DT-XXAD) and a micro- injection pump (TERUMO). Saline is infused at room temperature into the bladder at a rate of 10 ml/hr. Intravesicular pressure is recorded continuously on a chart pen recorder (Yokogawa). At least three reproducible micturition cycles are recorded before a test compound administration.
  • test compounds (4) Administration of test compounds.
  • a test compound dissolved in the mixture of ethanol, Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.) and saline (1 : 1 : 8, v/v/v) is administered intravenously through the catheter.
  • mice are injected with a single intravenous injection of 10 ⁇ g of 145-2C11
  • test compound is administered intraperitoneally 60 min prior to the anti-CD3 mAb injection. Blood is collected 90 minutes after the antibody injection. Serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 ⁇ m. for 10 min. IL-2 and IL-4 levels in the serum are determined by an ELISA.
  • Mouse anti-IgD induced IgE production model
  • mice are injected intravenously with 0.8 mg of purified goat anti-mouse IgD antibody or PBS (defined as day 0). Compound is administered intraperitoneally from day 0 to day 6. On day 7 blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 ⁇ m. for 10 min. Serum total levels of IgE are determined by YAMASA's ELISA kit and their Ig subtypes are done by an Ig ELISA KIT (Rougier Biotech's, Montreal, Canada).
  • mice are injected intraperitoneally with LPS (200 ⁇ g/mouse). Compound is administered intraperitoneally 1 h before the LPS injection. Blood is collected at 90 min post-LPS injection and plasma is obtained. TNF- ⁇ concentration in the sample is determined using an ELISA kit.
  • mice are injected intradermally with a 2.5 ml of air on days -6 and -3 to prepare ai ⁇ ouch.
  • compound On day 0 compound is administered intraperitoneally 60 min before eotaxin injection (3 ⁇ g/mouse, i.d.).
  • IL-5 300 ng/mouse is injected intravenously 30 min before the eotaxin injection.
  • leukocytes in exudate is collected and the number of total cells is counted. The differential cell counts in the exudate are performed by staining with May-Grunwald Gimsa solution.
  • D10.G4.1 cells (1 x 10 cells/mouse) containing 2 mg of conalbumin in saline is administered i.v. to AKR mice. After 6 h blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for lOmin. IL-4 and IL-5 level in serum are determined by ELISA kits. Compound is administered intraperitoneally at -A and +1 h after these cells injection.
  • PCA Passive cutaneous anaphylaxis
  • the rats are killed, and the skin of the back is removed. Evans blue dye in the skin is extracted in formamide overnight at 63°C. Then an absorbance at 620 nm is measured to obtain the optical density of the leaked dye.
  • mice Effects on plasma cholesterol levels including HDL cholesterol are typically assessed in humanized apo-AI transgenic mice. Modulation of human target proteins can be determined in corresponding transgenic mice (e.g., CETP transgenic mice). Triglyceride-lowering is usually evaluated in ob/ob mice or Zucker rats. Animals are fed with normal diets or modified diets (e.g., enriched by 0.5% cholesterol 20%> coconut oil). Standard protocols consist of oral applications once daily for 7 to 10 days at doses ranging from 0,1 to 100 mg/kg. The compounds are dissolved (e.g., in Solutol/Ethanol/saline mixtures) and applied by oral gavage or intravenous injection. Before and at the end of the application period, blood samples are typically drawn by retroorbital punctuation. Plasma cholesterol and triglyceride levels are determined with standardized clinical diagnostic kits (e.g., INFINITYTM cholesterol reagent and
  • HDL cholesterol is determined after phosphotungstic acid precipitation of non-HDL lipoproteins or FPLC gel filtration with post-column derivatization of cholesterol using the reagents mentioned above. Plasma levels of human apolipoprotein-AI in relevant humanized transgenic mice are measured by immunoturbidimetry (Sigma).
  • mice Male Wistar rats weighing 300-350 g (Harlan Winkelmann, Borchen, Germany) are anesthetized with thiopental "Nycomed” (Nycomed, Kunststoff, Germany) 100 mg kg "1 i.p. A tracheotomy is performed, and catheters are inserted into the femoral artery for blood pressure and heart rate measurements (Gould pressure transducer and recorder, model RS 3400) and into the femoral vein for substance administration. The animals are ventilated with room air and their body temperature is controlled. Test compounds are administered orally or intravenously.
  • Female conscious SHR (Moellegaard/Denmark, 220 - 290 g) are equipped with implantable radiotelemetry, and a data aquisition system (Data Sciences, St. Paul, MN, USA), comprising a chronically implantable transducer/transmitter unit equipped with a fluid-filled catheter is used.
  • the transmitter is implanted into the peritoneal cavity, and the sensing catheter is inserted into the descending aorta.
  • the animals of control groups only receive the vehicle.
  • mean blood pressure and heart rate of treated and untreated control groups are measured.
  • Anesthesia is initiated by slow intravenous injection of 25 mg kg "1 sodium thiopental (Trapanal ® , Byk Gulden, Konstanz, Germany). The anesthesia is continued and maintained throughout the experiment by continuous infusion of 0.04 mg kg "1 h "1 fentanyl (Fentanyl ® , Janssen, Neuss, Germany) and 0.25 mg kg "1 h “1 droperidol (DihydrobenzperidolR, Janssen, Neuss, Germany). During this anaesthesia, heart rate is as low as 35-40 bpm due to increased vagal tone.
  • a parasympathetic blockade is achieved by intermittent injections of atropine (0.1 mg per animal) (AtropinsulfatR, Eifelfango, Bad Neuenahr, Germany). After intubation the animals are artificially ventilated at constant volume (EngstromR 300, Engstr ⁇ m, Sweden) with room air enriched with 30%> oxygen to maintain an end-tidal CO2 concentration of about 5%> (NormocapR, Datex, Finland).
  • a tip catheter for recording of left ventricular pressure is inserted into the ventricle via the carotid artery (PC350, Millar Instruments, Houston, TX, USA), a hollow catheter is inserted into the femoral artery and connected to a strain gauge (type 4-327-1, Telos Medical, Upland, CA, USA for recording of arterial blood pressure, two venous catheters are inserted into either femoral vein and one additional catheter into a forearm vein for application of the anesthetic and drugs, respectively, and an oxymetry catheter for recording of oxygen saturation is inserted into the coronary sinus via the jugular vein (Schwarzer IVH4, M ⁇ nchen, Germany).
  • LCX left coronary artery
  • LCX left coronary artery
  • an electromagnetic flow probe Gould Statham, Oxnard, CA, USA
  • Arterial blood pressure, electrocardiogram (lead II), left ventricular pressure, first derivative of left ventricular pressure (dP/dt), heart rate, coronary blood flow, and oxygen saturation in the coronary sinus are continuously recorded on a pen recorder (Brush, Gould, Cleveland, OH, USA).
  • the maximum of dP/dt is used as measure of left ventricular contractility (dP/dtmax).
  • test compound is intravenously applied as bolus injections. Care is taken that all measured cardiovascular parameters have returned to control level before injection of the next dose.
  • Each dose of the test compound is tested at least three times in different animals. The order of injection of the different doses is randomized in each animal.
  • Mononuclear cells from fresh blood were separated by Ficoll Paque ® (1.077 density, Amersham-Pharmacia) density gradient centrifugation, and CD34 + cells were purified by immunomagnetic separation system (MiniMACS, Miltenyi Biotec), according to the manufacture's instructions (Direct CD34 Progenitor Cell Isolation Kit, Miltenyi Biotec). The percentage of CD34 + cells were generally from 90-95%.
  • 1-2 x 10 4 CD34 + cells were plated in triplicate in 24-well plates with 1ml Iscoves modified Dulbecco medium (IMDM) (Invitrogen) containing 10%> fetal bovine serum (FCS, Invitrogen), 1% Glutamine (Invitrogen) supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml) (PeproTech), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) (Erypo ® FS 4000, Cilag) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1-IMDM (Invitrogen) containing 10%> fetal bovine serum (FCS, Invitrogen), 1% Glutamine (Invitrogen) supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml) (PeproTech), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) (Erypo ® FS 4000, Cilag)
  • IL-3 (10 ng/ml) (PeproTech) with different concentration of erythro- poietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds.
  • the cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO 2 .
  • erythroid burst forming units BFU-E
  • cells were dissolved from methylcellulose with 0.1 % NaCl solution.
  • erythroid progenitors were plated in triplicate in 24-well plates with 1 ml IMDM containing 10% FCS, 1% glutamine supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml), different concentration of erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds.
  • Control cells were incubated with 0.1-0.2%) DMSO instead of compounds.
  • the cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO 2 . After 6 to 8 days cells were harvested and counted to analyze proliferation.
  • IMDM containing 10%> FCS, 1% Glutamine supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds.
  • Control cells were incubated with 0.1-0.2%) DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO 2 . After 6 to 8 days cells were harvested and counted to analyze proliferation.
  • CD34 + cells isolated from peripheral blood, cord blood or from bone marrow were pre-incubated in quadruplicate in 24-well plates in 1ml medium (StemSpan) with 15% FCS, SCF (20 ng/ml) and GM-CSF (2,5 ng/ml) for 6 to 7 days at 37°C and 5.5%) CO2. Then compounds (0.1.1 or 10 ⁇ M in DMSO) with or without G-CSF
  • the number of the early myelopoietic CD15 + /CDllb " cells and the number of the late myelopoietic CD15 + /CDl lb + cells were determined by cell count (proliferation) and FACS (fluorescent associated cell sorting) analysis (differentiation) at day 13-14.
  • CD34 + cells isolated from peripheral blood, cord blood or from bone marrow were incubated in quadruplicate 24-well plates in 1 ml serum-free medium with 2% BSA, SCF (20 ng/ml) and compounds ( 0.1,1 or 10 ⁇ M in DMSO) with or without
  • TPO 0.-10 ng/ml for 12 to 13 days at 37°C and 5% CO 2 .
  • the number of the megakaryoid CD41 + cells (scatter profile) were determined by FACS analysis. Megakaryocytes will be examined by microscope if necessary.
  • mice were used for compound testing.
  • other species e.g. rats, hamsters or guinea pigs have been used in addition.
  • repeated dosage is required for detection of changes in peripheral blood parameters.
  • blood samples were drawn for analysis of red and white blood cell counts as well as platelet counts using an automated blood analyzer.
  • erythropoiesis was assessed by manual hematocrit and reticulocyte count determination. For specific analysis of leukocyte differentiation fluorescent associated cell sorting (FACS) was used.
  • FACS leukocyte differentiation fluorescent associated cell sorting
  • Immunocompetent Balb/c mice were treated with compounds at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to 4 days.
  • the WBC white blood cells count
  • the neutrophil count were monitored by FACS (CD1 lb + ; scatter properties).
  • Immunocompromised Balb/c were generated by intravenous treatment with 5-FU (100 mg/kg i.p). 24 hours later the mice were treated with the test compound at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to 7 to 13 days.
  • Peripheral blood counts (WBC, RBC, PLT) have been determined after retroorbital plexus puncture at days 5,7,11 and 14.
  • WBC, RBC, PLT Peripheral blood counts
  • the expression of specific differentiation markers on stem and progenitor cells e.g. CD34, CD33, CD38, CDl lb
  • scatter properties were investigated.
  • Thrombopoietic compounds at different doses were administered orally or parenterally following chemotherapy (Carboplatin, 100 mg/kg i.p) immunocompromised mice. After repeated administration (once/day or bid for five to seven days) peripheral blood platelets (automated blood analyzer) have been determined after retroorbital plexus punction at day 5, 7, 11, and 14.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Micro-Organisms Or Cultivation Processes Thereof (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Abstract

Reagents that regulate human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor and reagents which bind to human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene products can play a role in preventing, ameliorating, or correcting dysfunctions or diseases including, but not limited to cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal and liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders and urologic disorders.

Description

REGULATION OF HUMAN GROWTH HORMONE-RELEASING HORMONE RECEPTOR
This application incorporates by reference co-pending US provisional application
Serial No. 60/390,443 filed June 24, 2002.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to the regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Many medically significant biological processes are mediated by signal transduction pathways that involve G proteins (Lefkowitz, Nature 351, 353-54, 1991). The family of G protein-coupled receptors (GPCR) includes receptors for hormones, neurotransmitters, growth factors, and viruses. Specific examples of GPCRs include receptors for such diverse agents as calcitonin, adrenergic hormones, endothelin, cAMP, adenosine, acetylcholine, serotonin, dopamine, histamine, thrombin, kinin, follicle stimulating hormone, opsins, endothelial differentiation gene-1, rhodopsins, odorants, cytomegalovirus, G proteins themselves, effector proteins such as phospholipase C, adenyl cyclase, and phosphodiesterase, and actuator proteins such as protein kinase A and protein kinase C.
The GPCR protein superfamily now contains over 250 types of paralogues, receptors that represent variants generated by gene duplications (or other processes), as opposed to orthologues, the same receptor from different species. The superfamily can be broken down into five families: Family I, receptors typified by rhodopsin and the β2-adrenergic receptor and currently represented by over 200 unique members
(reviewed by Dohlman et al., Ann. Rev. Biochem. 60, 653-88, 1991, and references therein); Family II, the recently characterized parathyroid hormone/calcitonin/- secretin receptor family (Juppner et al., Science 254, 1024-26, 1991; Lin et al., Science 254, 1022-24, 1991); Family III, the metabotropic glutamate receptor family in mammals (Nakanishi, Science 258, 597-603, 1992); Family TV, the cAMP receptor family, important in the chemotaxis and development of D. discoideum
(Klein et ah, Science 241, 1467-72, 1988; and Family V, the fmgal mating pheromone receptors such as STE2 (reviewed by Kurjan, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 61, 1097-129, 1992).
GPCRs possess seven conserved membrane-spanning domains connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. GPCRs (also known as 7TM receptors) have been characterized as including these seven conserved hydrophobic stretches of about 20 to 30 amino acids, connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. Most GPCRs have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops, which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure. The seven transmembrane regions are designated as TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4, TM5, TM6, and TM7. TM3 has been implicated in signal transduction.
Phosphorylation and lipidation (palmitylation or farnesylation) of cysteine residues can influence signal transduction of some GPCRs. Most GPCRs contain potential phosphorylation sites within the third cytoplasmic loop and/or the carboxy terminus. For several GPCRs, phosphorylation by protein kinase A and/or specific receptor kinases mediates receptor desensitization.
For some receptors, the ligand binding sites of GPCRs are believed to comprise hydrophilic sockets formed by several GPCR transmembrane domains. The hydrophilic sockets are surrounded by hydrophobic residues of the GPCRs. The hydrophilic side of each GPCR transmembrane helix is postulated to face inward and form a polar ligand binding site. TM3 has been implicated in several GPCRs as having a ligand binding site, such as the TM3 aspartate residue. TM5 serines, a TM6 asparagine, and TM6 or TM7 phenylalanines or tyrosines also are implicated in ligand binding. GPCRs are coupled inside the cell by heterotrimeric G proteins to various intracellular enzymes, ion channels, and transporters (see Johnson et al, Endoc. Rev. 10, 317-31, 1989). Different G protein alpha subunits preferentially stimulate particular effectors to modulate various biological functions in a cell. Phospho- rylation of cytoplasmic residues of GPCRs is an important mechanism for the regulation of some GPCRs. For example, in one form of signal transduction, the effect of hormone binding is the activation inside the cell of the enzyme, adenylate cyclase. Enzyme activation by hormones is dependent on the presence of the nucleotide GTP. GTP also influences hormone binding. A G protein connects the hormone receptor to adenylate cyclase. G protein exchanges GTP for bound GDP when activated by a hormone receptor. The GTP-carrying form then binds to activated adenylate cyclase. Hydrolysis of GTP to GDP, catalyzed by the G protein itself, returns the G protein to its basal, inactive form. Thus, the G protein serves a dual role, as an intermediate that relays the signal from receptor to effector, and as a clock that controls the duration of the signal.
Over the past 15 years, nearly 350 therapeutic agents targeting GPCRs receptors have been successfully introduced onto the market. This indicates that these receptors have an established, proven history as therapeutic targets.
Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
Growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH) is an extracellular signal that exerts its effect on cells through a G-protein transmembrane signaling pathway. GHRH can bind to GHRH cell surface receptors and thereby activate G-proteins which, in turn, stimulate adenylate cyclase to produce cyclic AMP (cAMP) from ATP. Cyclic AMP influences many cellular processes, typically by stimulating the activity of protein kinases that transfer terminal phosphate groups from ATP to specific amino acids on target proteins. Phosphorylation typically alters the activity of these proteins, either raising or lowering the activity. There is a need in the art to identify receptors for GHRH, which can be regulated to provide therapeutic effects.
It is an object of the invention to provide reagents and methods of regulating a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor. This and other objects of the invention are provided by one or more of the embodiments described below.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
Fig. 1 shows the BLASTP - alignment of 866 against swissnew|Q02643|GRFR_HUMAN [DE:Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor precursor (GHRH receptor) (GRF receptor) # This hit is scoring at : 0.0 (expectation value) Alignment length (overlap) : 434 Identities : 97 %
Scoring matrix : BLOSUM62 (used to infer consensus pattern) Database searched : nrdb_l_
Fig. 2 to 6 show the relative mRNA expression of the GHRH receptor in various human tissues.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to an isolated polynucleotide from the group consisting of:
a) a polynucleotide encoding a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of: amino acid sequences which are at least about 98% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2. b) a polynucleotide comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3;
c) a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent conditions to a polynucleotide specified in (a) and (b) and encodes a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide;
d) a polynucleotide the sequence of which deviates from the polynucleotide sequences specified in (a) to (c) due to the degeneration of the genetic code and encodes a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) poly- peptide; and
e) a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d) and encodes a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide.
A novel human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is a discovery of the present invention. Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2. A DNA sequence harboring the coding sequence (ORF) for human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is shown in SEQ ID NO: 1. This sequence is located on chromosome 7, map 7 l4.3.
The ORF is shown in SEQ ID NO: 3. A homologues sequence Q02643, a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GHRH receptor), which lacks a 10 amino acid stretch of the novel receptor of the invention is shown in SEQ ID NO: 4.
A 7 transmembrane receptor (7tm_2) region and a hormone receptor domain region are identified. This extracellular hormone domain contains four conserved cysteines (shown in bold in FIG. 1) that probably form disulphide bridges. This domain is found in a variety of hormone receptors. It may be a ligand binding domain. Seven transmembrane helices are underlined, and prosite conservative regions are shown in italics. A ten amino acid insertion is located in the first extracellular loop between helices two and three and most likely is involved in ligand binding. Related human ESTs are shown in SEQ ID NOs:5 and 6. Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor of the invention is expected to be useful for the same purposes as previously identified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptors. Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is believed to be useful in therapeutic methods to treat disorders such as cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal and liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders and urologic disorders. Human growth hormone-
: releasing hormone receptor also can be used to screen for human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor activators and inhibitors.
One embodiment of the present invention is an expression vector containing any polynucleotide of the present invention.
Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a host cell containing any expression vector of the present invention.
Still another embodiment of the present invention is a substantially purified Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by any poly- nucleotide of the present invention.
Even another embodiment of the present invention is a method of producing a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide of the present invention, wherein the method comprises the following steps:
a. culturing the host cells of the present invention under conditions suitable for the expression of the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide; and b. recovering the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide from the host cell culture. Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method for detecting a polynucleotide encoding a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide in a biological sample comprising the following steps: a. hybridizing any polynucleotide of the present invention to a nucleic acid material of a biological sample, thereby forming a hybridization complex; and b. detecting said hybridization complex.
Still another embodiment of the present invention is a method for detecting a polynucleotide of the present invention or a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide of the present invention comprising the steps of: a. contacting a biological sample with a reagent which specifically interacts with the polynucleotide or the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide and b. detecting the interaction
Even another embodiment of the present invention is a diagnostic kit for conducting any method of the present invention.
Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
(GPCR), comprising the steps of: a. contacting a test compound with a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of the present invention; b. detecting binding of the test compound to the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR).
Still another embodiment of the present invention is a method of screening for agents which regulate the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the steps of: a. contacting a test compound with a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of the present invention; and b. detecting a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) activity of the polypeptide, wherein a test compound which increases the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) activity is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing the activity of the Growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), and wherein a test compound which decreases the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) activity of the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of the Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR).
Even another embodiment of the present invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the step of: contacting a test compound with any polynucleotide of the present invention and detecting binding of the test compound to the polynucleotide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR).
Yet another embodiment of the present invention is a method of reducing the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the step of: contacting a cell with a reagent which specifically binds to any poly- nucleotide of the present invention or any Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide of the present invention, whereby the activity of Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) is reduced.
Still another embodiment of the present invention is a reagent that modulates the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide or a polynucleotide wherein said reagent is identified by any methods of the present invention. Even another embodiment of the present invention is a pharmaceutical composition, comprising: an expression vector of the present invention or a reagent of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
Yet another embodiment of the present invention is the use of an expression vector of the present invention or a reagent of the present invention for modulating the activity of a Growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) in a disease, preferably cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal or liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders or urologic disorders.
The invention thus provides a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor that can be used to identify test compounds that may act, for example, as activators or inhibitors. Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor and fragments thereof also are useful in raising specific antibodies that can block the protein and effectively reduce its activity.
Polypeptides
Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides according to the invention comprise at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 400, 425, or 434 contiguous amino acids selected from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or a biologically active variant thereof, as defined below. A growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide of the invention therefore can be a portion of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor, a full-length growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor, or a fusion protein comprising all or a portion of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor. Biologically active variants
Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide variants which are biologically active, e.g., retain a functional activity, also are human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides. Preferably, naturally or non- naturally occurring human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide variants have amino acid sequences which are at least about 98, or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 2 or a fragment thereof. Percent identity between a putative human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide variant and an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2 is determined by conventional methods. See, for example, Altschul et al., Bull. Math. Bio. 48:603 (1986), and Henikoff & Henikoff, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA SP:10915 (1992). Briefly, two amino acid sequences are aligned to optimize the alignment scores using a gap opening penalty of 10, a gap extension penalty of 1, and the "BLOSUM62" scoring matrix of Henikoff & Henikoff, 1992.
Those skilled in the art appreciate that there are many established algorithms available to align two amino acid sequences. The "FASTA" similarity search algorithm of Pearson & Lipman is a suitable protein alignment method for examining the level of identity shared by an amino acid sequence disclosed herein and the amino acid sequence of a putative variant. The FASTA algorithm is described by Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 55:2444(1988), and by Pearson, Meth. Enzymol. 183:63 (1990). Briefly, FASTA first characterizes sequence similarity by identifying regions shared by the query sequence (e.g., SEQ ID NO: 2) and a test sequence that have either the highest density of identities (if the ktup variable is 1) or pairs of identities (if ktup=2), without considering conservative amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions. The ten regions with the highest density of identities are then rescored by comparing the similarity of all paired amino acids using an amino acid substitution matrix, and the ends of the regions are "trimmed" to include only those residues that contribute to the highest score. If there are several regions with scores greater than the "cutoff value (calculated by a predetermined formula based upon the length of the sequence the ktup value), then - l i ¬
the trimmed initial regions are examined to determine whether the regions can be joined to form an approximate alignment with gaps. Finally, the highest scoring regions of the two amino acid sequences are aligned using a modification of the Needleman-Wunsch- Sellers algorithm (Needleman & Wunsch, J Mol. Biol.48: AAA (1970); Sellers, SIAM J. Appl. Math.26:7S7 (1974)), which allows for amino acid insertions and deletions. Preferred parameters for FASTA analysis are: ktup=l, gap opening penalty=10, gap extension penalty=l, and substitution matrix=BLOSUM62. These parameters can be introduced into a FASTA program by modifying the scoring matrix file ("SMATRIX"), as explained in Appendix 2 of Pearson, Meth. Enzymol. 183:63 (1990).
FASTA can also be used to determine the sequence identity of nucleic acid molecules using a ratio as disclosed above. For nucleotide sequence comparisons, the ktup value can range between one to six, preferably from three to six, most preferably three, with other parameters set as default.
Variations in percent identity can be due, for example, to amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions. Amino acid substitutions are defined as one for one amino acid replacements. They are conservative in nature when the substituted amino acid has similar structural and/or chemical properties. Examples of conservative replacements are substitution of a leucine with an isoleucine or valine, an aspartate with a glutamate, or a threonine with a serine.
Amino acid insertions or deletions are changes to or within an amino acid sequence. They typically fall in the range of about 1 to 5 amino acids. Guidance in determining which amino acid residues can be substituted, inserted, or deleted without abolishing biological or immunological activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be found using computer programs well known in the art, such as DNASTAR software.
The invention additionally, encompasses growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides that are differentially modified during or after translation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications can be carried out by known techniques including, but not limited, to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH4, acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction, metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin, etc.
Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the invention include, for example, e.g., N-linked or O- linked carbohydrate chains, processing of N- terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemical moieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of an N-terminal methionine residue as a result of prokaryotic host cell expression. The growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides may also be modified with a detectable label, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein.
The invention also provides chemically modified derivatives of growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides that may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogenicity (see U.S. Patent No. 4,179,337). The chemical moieties for derivitization can be selected from water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, and the like. The polypeptides can be modified at random or predetermined positions within the molecule and can include one, two, three, or more attached chemical moieties.
Whether an amino acid change or a polypeptide modification results in a biologically active growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can readily be determined by assaying for functional activity, as described in the specific examples, below. Fusion proteins
Fusion proteins are useful for generating antibodies against growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide amino acid sequences and for use in various assay systems. For example, fusion proteins can be used to identify proteins that interact with portions of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. Protein affinity chromatography or library-based assays for protein- protein interactions, such as the yeast two-hybrid or phage display systems, can be used for this purpose. Such methods are well known in the art and also can be used as drug screens.
A human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide fusion protein comprises two polypeptide segments fused together by means of a peptide bond. The first polypeptide segment comprises a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, such as those described above. The first polypeptide segment also can comprise full-length growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor.
The second polypeptide segment can be a full-length protein or a protein fragment. Proteins commonly used in fusion protein construction include β-galactosidase, β- glucuronidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP), autofluorescent proteins, including blue fluorescent protein (BFP), glutathione-S-transferase (GST), luciferase, horseradish peroxidase (HRP), and chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT). Additionally, epitope tags are used in fusion protein constructions, including histidine (His) tags, FLAG tags, influenza hemagglutinin (HA) tags, Myc tags, VSV-G tags, and thioredoxin (Trx) tags. Other fusion constructions can include maltose binding protein (MBP), S-tag, Lex a DNA binding domain (DBD) fusions, GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions, and herpes simplex virus (HSV) BP16 protein fusions. A fusion protein also can be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety. A fusion protein can be synthesized chemically, as is known in the art. Preferably, a fusion protein is produced by covalently linking two polypeptide segments or by standard procedures in the art of molecular biology. Recombinant DNA methods can be used to prepare fusion proteins, for example, by making a DNA construct which comprises coding sequences selected from SEQ ID NO: 1 in proper reading frame with nucleotides encoding the second polypeptide segment and expressing the DNA construct in a host cell, as is known in the art. Many kits for constructing fusion proteins are available from companies such as Promega Corporation (Madison, WI), Stratagene (La Jolla, CA), CLONTECH (Mountain View, CA), Santa Cruz Biotechnology (Santa Cruz, CA), MBL International Corporation (MIC;
Watertown, MA), and Quantum Biotechnologies (Montreal, Canada; 1-888-DNA- KITS).
Identification of species homologs
Species homologs of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be obtained using growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide polynucleotides (described below) to make suitable probes or primers for screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast, identifying cDNAs which encode homologs of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, and expressing the cDNAs as is known in the art.
Polynucleotides
A human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be single- or double-stranded and comprises a coding sequence or the complement of a coding sequence for a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. A coding sequence for human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is shown in SEQ ID NO: 3.
Degenerate nucleotide sequences encoding human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides, as well as homologous nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or their complements also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. Percent sequence identity between the sequences of two polynucleotides is determined using computer programs such as ALIGN which employ the FASTA algorithm, using an affine gap search with a gap open penalty of -12 and a gap extension penalty of -2. Complementary DNA (cDNA) molecules, species homologs, and variants of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides that encode biologically active growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides also are growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. Polynucleotide fragments comprising at least 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20, or 25 contiguous nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or their complements also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. These fragments can be used, for example, as hybridization probes or as antisense oligonucleotides.
Identification of polynucleotide variants and homologs
Variants and homologs of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides described above also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. Typically, homologous growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide sequences can be identified by hybridization of candidate polynucleotides to known growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides under stringent conditions, as is known in the art. For example, using the following wash conditions~2X SSC (0.3 M NaCl, 0.03 M sodium citrate, pH 7.0), 0.1% SDS, room temperature twice, 30 minutes each; then 2X SSC, 0.1 % SDS, 50°C once, 30 minutes; then 2X SSC, room temperature twice, 10 minutes each- homologous sequences can be identified which contain at most about 25-30% basepair mismatches. More preferably, homologous nucleic acid strands contain 15-25%) basepair mismatches, even more preferably 5-15% basepair mismatches.
Species homologs of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides disclosed herein also can be identified by making suitable probes or primers and screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast. Human variants of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides can be identified, for example, by screening human cDNA expression libraries. It is well known that the Tm of a double-stranded DNA decreases by 1-1.5°C with every 1% decrease in homology (Bonner et al, J. Mol.
Biol. 81, 123 (1973). Variants of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides or growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides of other species can therefore be identified by hybridizing a putative homologous growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide with a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or the complement thereof to form a test hybrid. The melting temperature of the test hybrid is compared with the melting temperature of a hybrid comprising polynucleotides having perfectly complementary nucleotide sequences, and the number or percent of basepair mismatches within the test hybrid is calculated.
Nucleotide sequences which hybridize to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides or their complements following stringent hybridization and/or wash conditions also are growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. Stringent wash conditions are well known and understood in the art and are disclosed, for example, in Sambrook et al., MOLECULAR CLONING: A
LABORATORY MANUAL, 2d ed., 1989, at pages 9.50-9.51.
Typically, for stringent hybridization conditions a combination of temperature and salt concentration should be chosen that is approximately 12-20°C below the calculated Tm of the hybrid under study. The Tm of a hybrid between a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3 or the complement thereof and a polynucleotide sequence which is at least about 50, preferably about 75, 90, 96, or 98% identical to one of those nucleotide sequences can be calculated, for example, using the equation of Bolton and McCarthy, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 48, 1390 (1962): Tm - 81.5°C - 16.6(log10[Na+]) + 0.41(%G + C) - 0.63(%formamide) - 600//), where / = the length of the hybrid in basepairs.
Stringent wash conditions include, for example, 4X SSC at 65°C, or 50% formamide, 4X SSC at 42°C, or 0.5X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65°C. Highly stringent wash conditions include, for example, 0.2X SSC at 65°C.
Preparation of polynucleotides
A human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be isolated free of other cellular components such as membrane components, proteins, and lipids. Polynucleotides can be made by a cell and isolated using standard nucleic acid purification techniques, or synthesized using an amplification technique, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or by using an automatic synthesizer. Methods for isolating polynucleotides are routine and are known in the art. Any such technique for obtaining a polynucleotide can be used to obtain isolated growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. For example, restriction enzymes and probes can be used to isolate polynucleotide fragments, which comprise growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor nucleotide sequences. Isolated polynucleotides are in preparations that are free or at least 70, 80, or 90% free of other molecules.
Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor cDNA molecules can be made with standard molecular biology techniques, using growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor mRNA as a template. Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor cDNA molecules can thereafter be replicated using molecular biology techniques known in the art and disclosed in manuals such as Sambrook et al. (1989). An amplification technique, such as PCR, can be used to obtain additional copies of polynucleotides of the invention, using either human genomic DNA or cDNA as a template. Alternatively, synthetic chemistry techniques can be used to synthesize growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. The degeneracy of the genetic code allows alternate nucleotide sequences to be synthesized which will encode a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide having, for example, an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or a biologically active variant thereof.
Extending polynucleotides
Various PCR-based methods can be used to extend the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein to detect upstream sequences such as promoters and regulatory elements. Sarkar, PCR Methods Applic. 2, 318-322, 1993; Triglia et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 16, 8186, 1988; Lagerstrom et al, PCR Methods Applic. 1, 111-119, 1991; Parker et al, Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 3055-3060, 1991). Additionally, PCR, nested primers, and PROMOTERFINDER libraries (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif.) can be used to walk genomic DNA (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif). See WO 01/98340.
Obtaining Polynucleotides
Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be obtained, for example, by purification from human cells, by expression of growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides, or by direct chemical synthesis.
Protein purification
Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be purified from any human cell which expresses the receptor, including host cells which have been transfected with growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotides. A purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is separated from other compounds that normally associate with the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide in the cell, such as certain proteins, carbohydrates, or lipids, using methods well-known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate fractionation, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, and preparative gel electrophoresis.
A preparation of purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides is at least 80% pure; preferably, the preparations are 90%, 95%, or 99% pure. Purity of the preparations can be assessed by any means known in the art, such as SDS- polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.
Expression of polynucleotides
To express a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide, the polynucleotide can be inserted into an expression vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described, for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) and in Ausubel et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, New York, N.Y., 1989.
A variety of expression vector/host systems can be utilized to contain and express sequences encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms, such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors, insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculo virus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids), or animal cell systems. See WO 01/98340. Host cells
A host cell strain can be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation. Post-translational processing which cleaves a "prepro" form of the polypeptide also can be used to facilitate correct insertion, folding and/or function. Different host cells that have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for post-translational activities (e.g., CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38) are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC; 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, VA 20110-2209) and can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein. See WO 01/98340.
Detecting expression
Although the presence of marker gene expression suggests that the growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if a sequence encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, transformed cells containing sequences which encode an growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a sequence encoding an growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide.
Alternatively, host cells which contain a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide and which express a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). Hampton et al, SEROLOGICAL METHODS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, APS Press, St. Paul, Minn., 1990) and Maddox et al, J Exp. Med. 158, 1211-1216, 1983). See also
WO 01/98340.
A wide variety of labels and conjugation techniques are known by those skilled in the art and can be used in various nucleic acid and amino acid assays. Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides encoding growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling, or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide. Alternatively, sequences encoding a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe. Such vectors are known in the art, are commercially available, and can be used to synthesize RNA probes in vitro by addition of labeled nucleotides and an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6. These procedures can be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Promega, and US Biochemical). Suitable reporter molecules or labels which can be used for ease of detection include radionuclides, enzymes, and fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents, as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like.
Expression and purification of polypeptides
Host cells transformed with nucleotide sequences encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture. The polypeptide produced by a transformed cell can be secreted or contained intra- cellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used. As will be understood by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides which encode growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of soluble growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane or which direct the membrane insertion of membrane-bound growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. See WO 01/98340.
Chemical synthesis
Sequences encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see Caruthers et al, Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 215-223, 1980; Horn et al.
Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 225-232, 1980). Alternatively, a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide itself can be produced using chemical methods to synthesize its amino acid sequence, such as by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154, 1963; Roberge et al, Science 269, 202-204, 1995). Protein synthesis can be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis can be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431 A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer). Optionally, fragments of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides can be separately synthesized and combined using chemical methods to produce a full-length molecule.
Production of altered polypeptides
As will be understood by those of skill in the art, it may be advantageous to produce growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequences possessing non-naturally occurring codons. For example, codons preferred by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce an RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence. The nucleotide sequences disclosed herein can be engineered using methods generally known in the art to alter growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide-encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the polypeptide or mRNA product. DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences. For example, site-directed mutagenesis can be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, introduce mutations, and so forth.
Antibodies
Any type of antibody known in the art can be generated to bind specifically to an epitope of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. "Antibody" as used herein includes intact immunoglobulin molecules, as well as fragments thereof, such as Fab, F(ab') , and Fv, which are capable of binding an epitope of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. Typically, at least 6, 8, 10, or 12 contiguous amino acids are required to form an epitope. However, epitopes which involve non-contiguous amino acids may require more, e.g., at least 15, 25, or 50 amino acids.
An antibody which specifically binds to an epitope of a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be used therapeutically, as well as in immunochemical assays, such as Western blots, ELISAs, radioimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art. Various immunoassays can be used to identify antibodies having the desired specificity. Numerous protocols for competitive binding or immunoradiometric assays are well known in the art. Such immunoassays typically involve the measurement of complex formation between an immunogen and an antibody that specifically binds to the immunogen. Typically, an antibody that specifically binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide provides a detection signal at least 5-, 10-, or 20-fold higher than a detection signal provided with other proteins when used in an immunochemical assay. Preferably, antibodies that specifically bind to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides do not detect other proteins in immunochemical assays and can immunoprecipitate a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide from solution. See WO 01/98340.
Antisense oligonucleotides
Antisense oligonucleotides are nucleotide sequences that are complementary to a specific DNA or RNA sequence. Once introduced into a cell, the complementary nucleotides combine with natural sequences produced by the cell to form complexes and block either transcription or translation. Preferably, an antisense oligonucleotide is at least 11 nucleotides in length, but can be at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides long. Longer sequences also can be used. Antisense oligonucleotide molecules can be provided in a DNA construct and introduced into a cell as described above to decrease the level of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene products in the cell.
Antisense oligonucleotides can be deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides, or a combination of both. Oligonucleotides can be synthesized manually or by an automated synthesizer, by covalently linking the 5' end of one nucleotide with the 3' end of another nucleotide with non-phosphodiester internucleotide linkages such alkylphosphonates, phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, alkylphosphonothioates, alkylphosphonates, phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, carbamates, acetamidate, carboxymethyl esters, carbonates, and phosphate triesters. See Brown, Meth. Mol. Biol. 20, 1-8, 1994; Sonveaux, Meth. Mol. Biol. 26, 1-72, 1994; Uhlmann et al, Chem. Rev. 90, 543-583, 1990.
Modifications of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene expression can be obtained by designing antisense oligonucleotides that will form duplexes to the control, 5', or regulatory regions of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene. Oligonucleotides derived from the transcription initiation site, e.g., between positions -10 and +10 from the start site, are preferred. Similarly, inhibition can be achieved using "triple helix" base-pairing methodology. Triple helix pairing is useful because it causes inhibition of the ability of the double helix to open sufficiently for the binding of polymerases, transcription factors, or chaperons. Therapeutic advances using triplex DNA have been described in the literature (e.g., Gee et al, in Huber & Carr, MOLECULAR AND IMMUNOLOGIC APPROACHES, Futura Publishing Co., Mt. Kisco, N.Y., 1994). An antisense oligonucleotide also can be designed to block translation of mRNA by preventing the transcript from binding to ribosomes. See WO 01/98340.
Ribozymes
Ribozymes are RNA molecules with catalytic activity. See, e.g., Cech, Science 236,
1532-1539; 1987; Cech, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 59, 543-568; 1990, Cech, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 2, 605-609; 1992, Couture & Stinchcomb, Trends Genet. 12, 510-515, 1996. Ribozymes can be used to inhibit gene function by cleaving an RNA sequence, as is known in the art (e.g., Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673). The mechanism of ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage. Examples include engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that can specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of specific nucleotide sequences.
The coding sequence of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be used to generate ribozymes that will specifically bind to mRNA transcribed from the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide. Methods of designing and constructing ribozymes which can cleave other RNA molecules in trans in a highly sequence specific manner have been developed and described in the art (see Haseloff et al Nature 334, 585-591, 1988). For example, the cleavage activity of ribozymes can be targeted to specific RNAs by engineering a discrete "hybridization" region into the ribozyme. The hybridization region contains a sequence complementary to the target RNA and thus specifically hybridizes with the target (see, for example, Gerlach et al, EP 321,201). See WO 01/98340.
Differentially expressed genes
Described herein are methods for the identification of genes whose products interact with human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor. Such genes may represent genes that are differentially expressed in disorders including, but not limited to cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal and liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders and urologic disorders. Further, such genes may represent genes that are differentially regulated in response to manipulations relevant to the progression or treatment of such diseases.
Additionally, such genes may have a temporally modulated expression, increased or decreased at different stages of tissue or organism development. A differentially expressed gene may also have its expression modulated under control versus experimental conditions. In addition, the human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene or gene product may itself be tested for differential expression.
The degree to which expression differs in a normal versus a diseased state need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques. Other such standard characterization techniques by which expression differences may be visualized include but are not limited to, quantitative RT (reverse transcriptase), PCR, and Northern analysis.
To identify differentially expressed genes total RNA or, preferably, mRNA is isolated from tissues of interest. For example, RNA samples are obtained from tissues of experimental subjects and from corresponding tissues of control subjects.
Any RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA may be utilized for the purification of such RNA samples. See, for example, Ausubel et al, ed., CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, 1987-1993. Large numbers of tissue samples may readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski, U.S. Patent 4,843,155.
Transcripts within the collected RNA samples that represent RNA produced by differentially expressed genes are identified by methods well known to those of skill in the art. They include, for example, differential screening (Tedder et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85, 208-12, 1988), subtractive hybridization (Hedrick et al, Nature 308, 149-53; Lee et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 2825, 1984), and, preferably, differential display (Liang & Pardee, Science 257, 967-71, 1992; U.S. Patent 5,262,311).
The differential expression information may itself suggest relevant methods for the treatment of disorders involving the human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor. For example, treatment may include a modulation of expression of the differentially expressed genes and/or the gene encoding the human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor. The differential expression information may indicate whether the expression or activity of the differentially expressed gene or gene product or the human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene or gene product are up-regulated or down-regulated.
Screening methods
The invention provides assays for screening test compounds that bind to or modulate the activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide. A test compound preferably binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide. More preferably, a test compound decreases or increases functional activity by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% relative to the absence of the test compound. Test compounds
Test compounds can be pharmacologic agents already known in the art or can be compounds previously unknown to have any pharmacological activity. The compounds can be naturally occurring or designed in the laboratory. They can be isolated from microorganisms, animals, or plants, and can be produced recombinantly, or synthesized by chemical methods known in the art. If desired, test compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous combinatorial library methods known in the art, including but not limited to, biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the "one-bead one-compound" library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library approach is limited to polypeptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to polypeptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds. See Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12, 145, 1997.
Methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries are well known in the art (see, for example, DeWitt et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90, 6909, 1993; Erb et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91, 11422, 1994; Zuckermann et al, J. Med. Chem. 37, 2678, 1994; Cho et al, Science 261, 1303, 1993; Carell et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.
33, 2059, 1994; Carell et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33, 2061; Gallop et al, J. Med. Chem. 37, 1233, 1994). Libraries of compounds can be presented in solution (see, e.g., Houghten, BioTechniques 13, 412-421, 1992), or on beads (Lam, Nature 354, 82-84, 1991), chips (Fodor, Nature 364, 555-556, 1993), bacteria or spores (Ladner, U.S. Patent 5,223,409), plasmids (Cull et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
89, 1865-1869, 1992), or phage (Scott & Smith, Science 249, 386-390, 1990; Devlin, Science 249, 404-406, 1990); Cwirla et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97, 6378-6382, 1990; Felici, J. Mol. Biol. 222, 301-310, 1991; and Ladner, U.S. Patent 5,223,409). High throughput screening
Test compounds can be screened for the ability to bind to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides or polynucleotides or to affect growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor activity or growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene expression using high throughput screening. Using high throughput screening, many discrete compounds can be tested in parallel so that large numbers of test compounds can be quickly screened. The most widely established techniques utilize 96-well microtiter plates. The wells of the microtiter plates typically require assay volumes that range from 50 to 500 μl. In addition to the plates, many instruments, materials, pipettors, robotics, plate washers, and plate readers are commercially available to fit the 96-well format.
Alternatively, "free format assays," or assays that have no physical barrier between samples, can be used. For example, an assay using pigment cells (melanocytes) in a simple homogeneous assay for combinatorial peptide libraries is described by Jayawickreme et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 19, 1614-18 (1994). The cells are placed under agarose in petri dishes, then beads that carry combinatorial compounds are placed on the surface of the agarose. The combinatorial compounds are partially released the compounds from the beads. Active compounds can be visualized as dark pigment areas because, as the compounds diffuse locally into the gel matrix, the active compounds cause the cells to change colors.
Another example of a free format assay is described by Chelsky, "Strategies for Screening Combinatorial Libraries: Novel and Traditional Approaches," reported at the First Annual Conference of The Society for Biomolecular Screening in Philadelphia, Pa. (Nov. 7-10, 1995). Chelsky placed a simple homogenous enzyme assay for carbonic anhydrase inside an agarose gel such that the enzyme in the gel would cause a color change throughout the gel. Thereafter, beads carrying combinatorial compounds via a photolinker were placed inside the gel and the compounds were partially released by UV-light. Compounds that inhibited the enzyme were observed as local zones of inhibition having less color change. Yet another example is described by Salmon et al, Molecular Diversity 2, 57-63 (1996). In this example, combinatorial libraries were screened for compounds that had cytotoxic effects on cancer cells growing in agar.
Another high throughput screening method is described in Beutel et al, U.S. Patent 5,976,813. In this method, test samples are placed in a porous matrix. One or more assay components are then placed within, on top of, or at the bottom of a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support. When samples are introduced to the porous matrix they diffuse sufficiently slowly, such that the assays can be performed without the test samples running together.
Binding assays
For binding assays, the test compound is preferably a small molecule that binds to the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, such that normal biological activity is prevented. Examples of such small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide-like molecules.
In binding assays, either the test compound or the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can comprise a detectable label, such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase. Detection of a test compound that is bound to the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can then be accomplished, for example, by direct counting of radioemmission, by scintillation counting, or by determining conversion of an appropriate substrate to a detectable product.
Alternatively, binding of a test compound to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be determined without labeling either of the interactants. For example, a microphysiometer can be used to detect binding of a test compound with a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. A microphysiometer (e.g., Cytosensor™) is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between a test compound and a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (McConnell et al, Science 257, 1906-1912, 1992).
Determining the ability of a test compound to bind to a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide also can be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Bimolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander & Urbaniczky, Anal. Chem. 63, 2338-2345, 1991, and Szabo et al, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5,
699-705, 1995). BIA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore™). Changes in the optical phenomenon surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
In yet another aspect of the invention, a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be used as a "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,283,317; Zervos et al, Cell 72, 223-232, 1993; Madura et al, J. Biol. Chem. 268, 12046-12054, 1993; Bartel et al, BioTechniques 14, 920-924, 1993; Iwabuchi et al, Oncogene 8, 1693-1696, 1993; and Brent W094/10300), to identify other proteins which bind to or interact with the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide and modulate its activity.
The two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. For example, in one construct, polynucleotide encoding a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4). In the other construct a DNA sequence that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey" or "sample") can be fused to a polynucleotide that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey" proteins are able to interact in vivo to form an protein- dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ), which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression of the reporter gene can be detected, and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the DNA sequence encoding the protein that interacts with the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
It may be desirable to immobilize either the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound to facilitate separation of bound from unbound forms of one or both of the interactants, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay. Thus, either the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound can be bound to a solid support. Suitable solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass or plastic slides, tissue culture plates, microtiter wells, tubes, silicon chips, or particles such as beads (including, but not limited to, latex, polystyrene, or glass beads). Any method known in the art can be used to attach the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound to a solid support, including use of covalent and non-covalent linkages, passive absorption, or pairs of binding moieties attached respectively to the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound and the solid support. Test compounds are preferably bound to the solid support in an array, so that the location of individual test compounds can be tracked. Binding of a test compound to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (or polynucleotide) can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtiter plates, test tubes, and microcentrifuge tubes.
In one embodiment, the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is a fusion protein comprising a domain that allows the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide to be bound to a solid support. For example, glutathione-S-transferase fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and the non-adsorbed growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide; the mixture is then incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound components. Binding of the interactants can be determined either directly or indirectly, as described above.
Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the solid support before binding is determined.
Other techniques for immobilizing proteins or polynucleotides on a solid support also can be used in the screening assays of the invention. For example, either a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or a test compound can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Biotinylated growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides (or polynucleotides) or test compounds can be prepared from biotin-NHS(N- hydroxy- succinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce
Chemicals, Rockford, 111.) and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). Alternatively, antibodies which specifically bind to a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, polynucleotide, or a test compound, but which do not interfere with a desired binding site can be derivatized to the wells of the plate. Unbound target or protein can be trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation.
Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using anti- bodies which specifically bind to the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or test compound and SDS gel electrophoresis under non-reducing conditions.
Screening for test compounds which bind to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide also can be carried out in an intact cell. Any cell which comprises a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. A growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Binding of the test compound to a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide or polynucleotide is determined as described above.
Functional activity
Test compounds can be tested for the ability to increase or decrease the functional activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide. Functional activity can be measured as described in the specific examples, below.
Functional assays can be carried out after contacting either a purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, a cell membrane preparation, or an intact cell with a test compound. A test compound that decreases functional activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor activity. A test compound which increases functional activity of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor activity.
Gene expression
In another embodiment, test compounds that increase or decrease growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor gene expression are identified. A growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide is contacted with a test compound, and the expression of an RNA or polypeptide product of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide is determined. The level of expression of appropriate mRNA or polypeptide in the presence of the test compound is compared to the level of expression of mRNA or polypeptide in the absence of the test compound. The test compound can then be identified as a modulator of expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of mRNA or polypeptide is greater in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as a stimulator or enhancer of the mRNA or polypeptide expression. Alternatively, when expression of the mRNA or polypeptide is less in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of the mRNA or polypeptide expression.
The level of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor mRNA or polypeptide expression in the cells can be determined by methods well known in the art for detecting mRNA or polypeptide. Either qualitative or quantitative methods can be used. The presence of polypeptide products of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be determined, for example, using a variety of techniques known in the art, including immunochemical methods such as radioimmunoassay, Western blotting, and immunohistochemistry. Alternatively, polypeptide synthesis can be determined in vivo, in a cell culture, or in an in vitro translation system by detecting incorporation of labeled amino acids into a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
Such screening can be carried out either in a cell-free assay system or in an intact cell. Any cell that expresses a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. The growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Either a primary culture or an established cell line, such as CHO or human embryonic kidney 293 cells, can be used.
Pharmaceutical compositions
The invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions that can be administered to a patient to achieve a therapeutic effect. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can comprise, for example, a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polynucleotide, ribozymes or antisense oligonucleotides, antibodies which specifically bind to a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, or mimetics, activators, or inhibitors of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide activity. The compositions can be administered alone or in combination with at least one other agent, such as stabilizing compound, which can be administered in any sterile, biocompatible pharmaceutical carrier, including, but not limited to, saline, buffered saline, dextrose, and water. The compositions can be administered to a patient alone, or in combination with other agents, drugs or hormones.
In addition to the active ingredients, these pharmaceutical compositions can contain suitable pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries that facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered by any number of routes including, but not limited to, oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intramedullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, parenteral, topical, sublingual, or rectal means. Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration can be formulated using pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art in dosages suitable for oral administration. Such carriers enable the pharmaceutical compositions to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, and the like, for ingestion by the patient.
Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained through combination of active compounds with solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers, such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose, such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; gums including arabic and tragacanth; and proteins such as gelatin and collagen. If desired, disintegrating or solubilizing agents can be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate. Dragee cores can be used in conjunction with suitable coatings, such as concentrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound, i.e., dosage.
Pharmaceutical preparations that can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating, such as glycerol or sorbitol. Push-fit capsules can contain active ingredients mixed with a filler or binders, such as lactose or starches, lubricants, such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
Pharmaceutical formulations suitable for parenteral administration can be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiologically buffered saline. Aqueous injection suspensions can contain substances that increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. Additionally, suspensions of the active compounds can be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Non-lipid polycationic amino polymers also can be used for delivery.
Optionally, the suspension also can contain suitable stabilizers or agents that increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions. For topical or nasal administration, penetrants appropriate to the particular barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art. The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be manufactured in a manner that is known in the art, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping, or lyophilizing processes. The pharmaceutical composition can be provided as a salt and can be formed with many acids, including but not limited to, hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free base forms. In other cases, the preferred preparation can be a lyophilized powder which can contain any or all of the following: 1-50 mM histidine, 0.1%-2% sucrose, and 2-7% mannitol, at a pH range of 4.5 to 5.5, that is combined with buffer prior to use.
Further details on techniques for formulation and administration can be found in the latest edition of REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES (Maack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.). After pharmaceutical compositions have been prepared, they can be placed in an appropriate container and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition. Such labeling would include amount, frequency, and method of administration.
Therapeutic indications and methods
The human GHRH receptor can be regulated to treat cardiovascular disorders, gastrointestinal and liver diseases, cancer disorders, metabolic diseases, inflammatory diseases, hematological disorders, neurological disorders, respiratory diseases, reproduction disorders and urologic disorders.
It was found by the present applicant that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone is expressed in various human tissues.
Cardiovascular Disorders
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following cardiovascular related tissues: heart atrium (left), heart ventricle (left), aorta, artery, vein. Expression in the above mentioned tissues demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose cardiovascular diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat cardiovascular diseases. Cardiovascular diseases include but are not limited to disorders of the heart and the vascular system like congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, ischemic diseases of the heart, all kinds of atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, hypertensive vascular diseases, peripheral vascular diseases, and atherosclerosis.
Heart failure is defined as a pathophysiological state in which an abnormality of cardiac function is responsible for the failure of the heart to pump blood at a rate commensurate with the requirement of the metabolizing tissue. It includes all forms of pumping failures such as high-output and low-output, acute and chronic, right-sided or left-sided, systolic or diastolic, independent of the underlying cause.
Myocardial infarction (MI) is generally caused by an abrupt decrease in coronary blood flow that follows a thrombotic occlusion of a coronary artery previously narrowed by arteriosclerosis. MI prophylaxis (primary and secondary prevention) is included as well as the acute treatment of MI and the prevention of complications.
Ischemic diseases are conditions in which the coronary flow is restricted resulting in a perfusion which is inadequate to meet the myocardial requirement for oxygen. This group of diseases includes stable angina, unstable angina and asymptomatic ischemia.
Arrhythmias include all forms of atrial and ventricular tachyarrhythmias, atrial tachycardia, atrial flutter, atrial fibrillation, atrio-ventricular reentrant tachycardia, preexitation syndrome, ventricular tachycardia, ventricular flutter, ventricular fibrillation, as well as bradycardic forms of arrhythmias.
Hypertensive vascular diseases include primary as well as all kinds of secondary arterial hypertension, renal, endocrine, neurogenic, others. The genes may be used as drug targets for the treatment of hypertension as well as for the prevention of all complications arising from cardiovascular diseases.
Peripheral vascular diseases are defined as vascular diseases in which arterial and/or venous flow is reduced resulting in an imbalance between blood supply and tissue oxygen demand. It includes chronic peripheral arterial occlusive disease (PAOD), acute arterial thrombosis and embolism, inflammatory vascular disorders, Raynaud's phenomenon and venous disorders.
Atherosclerosis is a cardiovascular disease in which the vessel wall is remodeled, compromising the lumen of the vessel. The atherosclerotic remodeling process involves accumulation of cells, both smooth muscle cells and monocyte/macrophage inflammatory cells, in the intima of the vessel wall. These cells take up lipid, likely from the circulation, to form a mature atherosclerotic lesion. Although the formation of these lesions is a chronic process, occurring over decades of an adult human life, the majority of the morbidity associated with atherosclerosis occurs when a lesion ruptures, releasing thrombogenic debris that rapidly occludes the artery. When such an acute event occurs in the coronary artery, myocardial infarction can ensue, and in the worst case, can result in death.
The formation of the atherosclerotic lesion can be considered to occur in five overlapping stages such as migration, lipid accumulation, recruitment of inflammatory cells, proliferation of vascular smooth muscle cells, and extracellular matrix deposition. Each of these processes can be shown to occur in man and in animal models of atherosclerosis, but the relative contribution of each to the pathology and clinical significance of the lesion is unclear.
To high or to low levels of fats in the bloodstream, especially cholesterol, can cause long-term problems. The risk to develop atherosclerosis and coronary artery or carotid artery disease (and thus the risk of having a heart attack or stroke) increases with the total cholesterol level increasing. Nevertheless, extremely low cholesterol levels may not be healthy. Examples of disorders of lipid metabolism are hyperlipidemia (abnormally high levels of fats (cholesterol, triglycerides, or both) in the blood, may be caused by family history of hyperlipidemia, obesity, a high-fat diet, lack of exercise, moderate to high alcohol consumption, cigarette smoking, poorly controlled diabetes, and an underactive thyroid gland), hereditary hyper- lipidemias (type I hyperlipoproteinemia (familial hyperchylomicronemia), type II hyperlipoproteinemia (familial hypercholesterolemia), type III hyperlipoproteinemia, type IV hyperlipoproteinemia, or type V hyperlipoproteinemia), hypolipo- proteinemia, lipidoses (caused by abnormalities in the enzymes that metabolize fats), Gaucher's disease, Niemann-Pick disease, Fabry's disease, Wolman's disease, cerebrotendinous xanthomatosis, sitosterolemia, Refsum's disease, or Tay-Sachs disease.
Kidney disorders may lead to hyper or hypotension. Examples for kidney problems possibly leading to hypertension are renal artery stenosis, pyelonephritis, glomerulonephritis, kidney tumors, polycistic kidney disease, injury to the kidney, or radiation therapy affecting the kidney. Excessive urination may lead to hypotension.
Gastrointestinal and liver diseases
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the gastroenterological system: colon, colon tumor, liver, liver liver cirrhosis. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue colon tumor and healthy tissue colon, between diseased tissue liver liver cirrhosis and healthy tissue liver demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose gastroenterological disorders. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat gastroenterological disorders.
Gastrointestinal diseases comprise primary or secondary, acute or chronic diseases of the organs of the gastrointestinal tract which may be acquired or inherited, benign or malignant or metaplastic, and which may affect the organs of the gastrointestinal tract or the body as a whole. They comprise but are not limited to 1) disorders of the esophagus like achalasia, vigoruos achalasia, dysphagia, cricopharyngeal incoordination, pre-esophageal dysphagia, diffuse esophageal spasm, globus sensation, Barrett's metaplasia, gastroesophageal reflux, 2) disorders of the stomach and duodenum like functional dyspepsia, inflammation of the gastric mucosa, gastritis, stress gastritis, chronic erosive gastritis, atrophy of gastric glands, metaplasia of gastric tissues, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, neoplasms of the stomach, 3) disorders of the pancreas like acute or chronic pancreatitis, insufficiency of the exocrinic or endocrinic tissues of the pancreas like steatorrhea, diabetes, neoplasms of the exocrine or endocrine pancreas like 3.1) multiple endocrine neoplasia syndrome , ductal adenocarcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, islet cell tumors, insulinoma, gastrinoma, carcinoid tumors, glucagonoma, Zollinger-Ellison syndrome, Vipoma syndrome, malabsorption syndrome, 4) disorders of the bowel like chronic inflammatory diseases of the bowel, Crohn's disease, ileus, diarrhea and constipation, colonic inertia, megacolon, malabsorption syndrome, ulcerative colitis, 4.1) functional bowel disorders like irritable bowel syndrome, 4.2) neoplasms of the bowel like familial polyposis, adenocarcinoma, primary malignant lymphoma, carcinoid tumors, Kaposi's sarcoma, polyps, cancer of the colon and rectum.
Liver diseases comprise primary or secondary, acute or chronic diseases or injury of the liver which may be acquired or inherited, benign or malignant, and which may affect the liver or the body as a whole. They comprise but are not limited to disorders of the bilirubin metabolism, jaundice, syndroms of Gilbert's, Crigler-Najjar,
Dubin-Johnson and Rotor; intrahepatic cholestasis, hepatomegaly, portal hypertension, ascites, Budd-Chiari syndrome, portal-systemic encephalopathy, fatty liver, steatosis, Reye's syndrome, liver diseases due to alcohol, alcoholic hepatitis or cirrhosis, fibrosis and cirrhosis, fibrosis and cirrhosis of the liver due to inborn errors of metabolism or exogenous substances, storage diseases, syndromes of Gaucher's,
Zellweger's, Wilson's - disease, acute or chronic hepatitis, viral hepatitis and its variants, inflammatory conditions of the liver due to viruses, bacteria, fungi, protozoa, helminths; drug induced disorders of the liver, chronic liver diseases like primary sclerosing cholangitis, alphal-antitrypsin-deficiency, primary biliary cirrhosis, postoperative liver disorders like postoperative intrahepatic cholestasis, hepatic granulomas, vascular liver disorders associated with systemic disease, benign or malignant neoplasms of the liver, disturbance of liver metabolism in the new-born or prematurely born.
Cancer
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following cancer tissues: colon tumor, lung tumor, breast tumor, kidney tumor. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue colon tumor and healthy tissue colon, between diseased tissue lung tumor and healthy tissue lung, between diseased tissue breast tumor and healthy tissue breast, between diseased tissue kidney tumor and healthy tissue kidney demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of cancer. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat cancer.
Cancer disorders within the scope of the invention comprise any disease of an organ or tissue in mammals characterized by poorly controlled or uncontrolled multiplication of normal or abnormal cells in that tissue and its effect on the body as a whole. Cancer diseases within the scope of the invention comprise benign neoplasms, dysplasias, hyperplasias as well as neoplasms showing metastatic growth or any other transformations like e.g. leukoplakias which often precede a breakout of cancer. Cells and tissues are cancerous when they grow more rapidly than normal cells, displacing or spreading into the surrounding healthy tissue or any other tissues of the body described as metastatic growth, assume abnormal shapes and sizes, show changes in their nucleocytoplasmatic ratio, nuclear polychromasia, and finally may cease. Cancerous cells and tissues may affect the body as a whole when causing paraneoplastic syndromes or if cancer occurs within a vital organ or tissue, normal function will be impaired or halted, with possible fatal results. The ultimate involvement of a vital organ by cancer, either primary or metastatic, may lead to the death of the mammal affected. Cancer tends to spread, and the extent of its spread is usually related to an individual's chances of surviving the disease. Cancers are generally said to be in one of three stages of growth: early, or localized, when a tumor is still confined to the tissue of origin, or primary site; direct extension, where cancer cells from the tumour have invaded adjacent tissue or have spread only to regional lymph nodes; or metastasis, in which cancer cells have migrated to distant parts of the body from the primary site, via the blood or lymph systems, and have established secondary sites of infection. Cancer is said to be malignant because of its tendency to cause death if not treated. Benign tumors usually do not cause death, although they may if they interfere with a normal body function by virtue of their location, size, or paraneoplastic side effects. Hence benign tumors fall under the definition of cancer within the scope of the invention as well. In general, cancer cells divide at a higher rate than do normal cells, but the distinction between the growth of cancerous and normal tissues is not so much the rapidity of cell division in the former as it is the partial or complete loss of growth restraint in cancer cells and their failure to differentiate into a useful, limited tissue of the type that characterizes the functional equilibrium of growth of normal tissue. Cancer tissues may express certain molecular receptors and probably are influenced by the host's susceptibility and immunity and it is known that certain cancers of the breast and prostate, for example, are considered dependent on specific hormones for their existence. The term "cancer" under the scope of the invention is not limited to simple benign neoplasia but comprises any other benign and malign neoplasia like 1) Carcinoma, 2)
Sarcoma, 3) Carcinosarcoma, 4) Cancers of the blood-forming tissues, 5) tumors of nerve tissues including the brain, 6) cancer of skin cells. Cancer according to 1) occurs in epithelial tissues, which cover the outer body (the skin) and line mucous membranes and the inner cavitary structures of organs e.g. such as the breast, lung, the respiratory and gastrointestinal tracts, the endocrine glands, and the genitourinary system. Ductal or glandular elements may persist in epithelial tumors , as in adenocarcinomas like e.g. thyroid adenocarcinoma, gastric adenocarcinoma, uterine adenocarcinoma. Cancers of the pavement-cell epithelium of the skin and of certain mucous membranes, such as e.g. cancers of the tongue, lip, larynx, urinary bladder, uterine cervix, or penis, may be termed epidermoid or squamous-cell carcinomas of the respective tissues and and are in the scope of the definition of cancer as well. Cancer according to 2) develops in connective tissues, including fibrous tissues, adipose (fat) tissues, muscle, blood vessels, bone, and cartilage like e.g. osteogenic sarcoma; liposarcoma, fibrosarcoma, synovial sarcoma. Cancer according to 3) is cancer that develops in both epithelial and connective tissue. Cancer disease within the scope of this definition may be primary or secondary, whereby primary indicates that the cancer originated in the tissue where it is found rather than was established as a secondary site through metastasis from another lesion. Cancers and tumor diseases within the scope of this definition may be benign or malign and may affect all anatomical structures of the body of a mammal. By example but not limited to they comprise cancers and tumor diseases of I) the bone marrow and bone marrow derived cells (leukemias), II) the endocrine and exocrine glands like e.g. thyroid, parathyroid, pituitary, adrenal glands, salivary glands, pancreas III) the breast, like e.g. benign or malignant tumors in the mammary glands of either a male or a female, the mammary ducts, adenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, comedo carcinoma, Paget's disease of the nipple, inflammatory carcinoma of the young woman, IV) the lung, V) the stomach, VI) the liver and spleen, VII) the small intestine, VIII) the colon, IX) the bone and its supportive and connective tissues like malignant or benign bone tumour, e.g. malignant osteogenic sarcoma, benign osteoma, cartilage tumors; like malignant chondrosarcoma or benign chondroma; bone marrow tumors like malignant myeloma or benign eosinophilic granuloma, as well as metastatic tumors from bone tissues at other locations of the body; X) the mouth, throat, larynx, and the esophagus, XI) the urinary bladder and the internal and external organs and structures of the urogenital system of male and female like ovaries, uterus, cervix of the uterus, testes, and prostate gland, XII) the prostate, XIII) the pancreas, like ductal carcinoma of the pancreas; XIV) the lymphatic tissue like lymphomas and other tumors of lymphoid origin, XV) the skin, XVI) cancers and tumor diseases of all anatomical structures belonging to the the respiration and respiratory systems including thoracal muscles and linings, XVII) primary or secondary cancer of the lymph nodes XVIII) the tongue and of the bony structures of the hard palate or sinuses, XVIV) the mouth, cheeks, neck and salivary glands, XX) the blood vessels including the heart and their linings, XXI) the smooth or skeletal muscles and their ligaments and linings, XXII) the peripheral, the autonomous, the central nervous system including the cerebellum, XXIII) the adipose tissue. Metabolic Diseases
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following metabolic disease related tissues: liver, liver cirrhosis. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue liver liver cirrhosis and healthy tissue liver demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of metabolic diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat metabolic diseases.
Metabolic diseases are defined as conditions which result from an abnormality in any of the chemical or biochemical transformations and their regulating systems essential to producing energy, to regenerating cellular constituents, to eliminating unneeded products arising from these processes, and to regulate and maintain homeostasis in a mammal regardless of whether acquired or the result of a genetic transformation. Depending on which metabolic pathway is involved, a single defective transformation or disturbance of its regulation may produce consequences that are narrow, involving a single body function, or broad, affecting many organs, organ-systems or the body as a whole. Diseases resulting from abnormalities related to the fine and coarse mechanisms that affect each individual transformation, its rate and direction or the availability of substrates like amino acids, fatty acids, carbohydrates, minerals, cofactors, hormones, regardless whether they are inborn or acquired, are well within the scope of the definition of a metabolic disease according to this application.
Metabolic diseases often are caused by single defects in particular biochemical pathways, defects that are due to the deficient activity of individual enzymes or molecular receptors leading to the regulation of such enzymes. Hence in a broader sense disturbances of the underlying genes, their products and their regulation lie well within the scope of this definition of a metabolic disease. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases may affect 1) biochemical processes and tissues ubiquitous all over the body, 2) the bone, 3) the nervous system, 4) the endocrine system, 5) the muscle including the heart, 6) the skin and nervous tissue, 7) the urogenital system, 8) the homeostasis of body systems like water and electrolytes. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 1) comprise obesity, amyloidosis, disturbances of the amino acid metabolism like branched chain disease, hyperaminoacidemia, hyperaminoaciduria, disturbances of the metabolism of urea, hyperammonemia, mucopolysaccharidoses e.g. Maroteaux-Lamy syndrom, storage diseases like glycogen storage diseases and lipid storage diseases, glycogenosis diseases like Cori's disease, malabsorption diseases like intestinal carbohydrate malabsorption, oligosaccharidase deficiency like maltase-, lactase-, sucrase- insufficiency, disorders of the metabolism of fructose, disorders of the metabolism of galactose, galactosaemia, disturbances of carbohydrate utilization like diabetes, hypoglycemia, disturbances of pyruvate metabolism, hypolipidemia, hypolipo- proteinemia, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, carnitine or carnitine acyltransferase deficiency, disturbances of the porphyrin metabolism, porphyrias, disturbances of the purine metabolism, lysosomal diseases, metabolic diseases of nerves and nervous systems like gangliosidoses, sphingolipidoses, sulfatidoses, leucodystrophies, Lesch-Nyhan syndrome. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 2) comprise osteoporosis, osteomalacia like osteoporosis, osteopenia, osteogenesis imperfecta, osteopetrosis, osteonecrosis, Paget's disease of bone, hypophosphatemia. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 3) comprise cerebellar dysfunction, disturbances of brain metabolism like dementia, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's chorea, Parkinson's disease, Pick's disease, toxic encephalopathy, demyelinating neuropathies like inflammatory neuropathy, Guillain-Barre syndrome. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 4) comprise primary and secondary metabolic disorders associated with hormonal defects like any disorder stemming from either an hyperfunction or hypofunction of some hormone-secreting endocrine gland and any combination thereof. They comprise Sipple's syndrome, pituitary gland dysfunction and its effects on other endocrine glands, such as the thyroid, adrenals, ovaries, and testes, acromegaly, hyper- and hypothyroidism, euthyroid goiter, euthyroid sick syndrome, thyroiditis, and thyroid cancer, over- or underproduction of the adrenal steroid hormones, adrenogenital syndrome, Cushing's syndrome, Addison's disease of the adrenal cortex, Addison's pernicious anemia, primary and secondary aldosteronism, diabetes insipidus, carcinoid syndrome, disturbances caused by the dysfunction of the parathyroid glands, pancreatic islet cell dysfunction, diabetes, disturbances of the endocrine system of the female like estrogen deficiency, resistant ovary syndrome. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 5) comprise muscle weakness, myotonia, Duchenne's and other muscular dystrophies, dystrophia myotonica of Steinert, mitochondrial myopathies like disturbances of the catabolic metabolism in the muscle, carbohydrate and lipid storage myopathies, glycogenoses, myoglobinuria, malignant hyperthermia, polymyalgia rheumatica, dermatomyositis, primary myocardial disease, cardiomyopathy. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 6) comprise disorders of the ectoderm, neurofibromatosis, scleroderma and polyarteritis, Louis-Bar syndrome, von Hippel-Lindau disease, Sturge- Weber syndrome, tuberous sclerosis, amyloidosis, porphyria. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 7) comprise sexual dysfunction of the male and female. For example, but not limited to, metabolic diseases according to 8) comprise confused states and seizures due to inappropriate secretion of antidiuretic hormone from the pituitary gland, Liddle's syndrome, Bartter's syndrome, Fanconi's syndrome, renal electrolyte wasting, diabetes insipidus.
Diabetes
Diabetes mellitus is a common metabolic disorder characterized by an abnormal elevation in blood glucose, alterations in lipids and abnormalities (complications) in the cardiovascular system, eye, kidney and nervous system. Diabetes is divided into two separate diseases: type 1 diabetes (juvenile onset), which results from a loss of cells which make and secrete insulin, and type 2 diabetes (adult onset), which is caused by a defect in insulin secretion and a defect in insulin action.
Type 1 diabetes is initiated by an autoimmune reaction that attacks the insulin secreting cells (beta cells) in the pancreatic islets. Agents that prevent this reaction from occurring or that stop the reaction before destruction of the beta cells has been accomplished are potential therapies for this disease. Other agents that induce beta cell proliferation and regeneration also are potential therapies.
Type II diabetes is the most common of the two diabetic conditions (6% of the population). The defect in insulin secretion is an important cause of the diabetic condition and results from an inability of the beta cell to properly detect and respond to rises in blood glucose levels with insulin release. Therapies that increase the response by the beta cell to glucose would offer an important new treatment for this disease.
The defect in insulin action in Type II diabetic subjects is another target for therapeutic intervention. Agents that increase the activity of the insulin receptor in muscle, liver, and fat will cause a decrease in blood glucose and a normalization of plasma lipids. The receptor activity can be increased by agents that directly stimulate the receptor or that increase the intracellular signals from the receptor. Other therapies can directly activate the cellular end process, i.e. glucose transport or various enzyme systems, to generate an insulin-like effect and therefore a produce beneficial outcome. Because overweight subjects have a greater susceptibility to Type II diabetes, any agent that reduces body weight is a possible therapy.
Both Type I and Type diabetes can be treated with agents that mimic insulin action or that treat diabetic complications by reducing blood glucose levels. Likewise, agents that reduces new blood vessel growth can be used to treat the eye complications that develop in both diseases.
Obesity
Obesity and overweight are defined as an excess of body fat relative to lean body mass. An increase in caloric intake or a decrease in energy expenditure or both can bring about this imbalance leading to surplus energy being stored as fat. Obesity is associated with important medical morbidities and an increase in mortality. The causes of obesity are poorly understood and may be due to genetic factors, environmental factors or a combination of the two to cause a positive energy balance. In contrast, anorexia and cachexia are characterized by an imbalance in energy intake versus energy expenditure leading to a negative energy balance and weight loss. Agents that either increase energy expenditure and/or decrease energy intake, absorption or storage would be useful for treating obesity, overweight, and associated comorbidities. Agents that either increase energy intake and/or decrease energy expenditure or increase the amount of lean tissue would be useful for treating cachexia, anorexia and wasting disorders.
This gene, translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity, overweight, anorexia, cachexia, wasting disorders, appetite suppression, appetite enhancement, increases or decreases in satiety, modulation of body weight, and/or other eating disorders such as bulimia. Also this gene, translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity/overweight-associated comorbidities including hypertension, type 2 diabetes, coronary artery disease, hyperlipidemia, stroke, gallbladder disease, gout, osteoarthritis, sleep apnea and respiratory problems, some types of cancer including endometrial, breast, prostate, and colon cancer, thrombolic disease, polycystic ovarian syndrome, reduced fertility, complications of pregnancy, menstrual irregularities, hirsutism, stress incontinence, and depression.
G protein-coupled receptors and obesity treatment
G protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) are integral membrane proteins characterized by seven transmembrane spanning helical domains that mediate the actions of many extracellular signals. GPCRs interact with heterotrimeric guanine nucleotide binding regulatory proteins (G proteins) that modulate a variety of second messenger systems or ionic conductances to effect physiological responses. In fact, almost 50% of currently marketed drugs elicit their therapeutic effects by interacting with GPCRs
(Kirkpatrick, Nat. Rev. Drug Disc. 1, 7, 2002). A number of peripherally and centrally acting signaling molecules produce a sense of hunger/satiety or produce elevation in lipid mobilization/oxidation through their interactions with GPCRs. There are numerous examples of neurotransmitters and hormones acting on central satiety pathways. Endocannabinoids, melanin concen- trating hormone, serotonin, dopamine, NPY, α-MSH, GLP-1, ghrelin and orexin serve as few examples of neurotransmitters/hormones that modulate satiety and/or energy expenditure through GPCRs (Di Marzo et al, Nature ¥70:822-25, 2001; Marsh et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA PP:3240-45, 2002; Nonogaki et al, Nat. Med. 4:1152-56, 1998; Gadde et al, Obes. Res. :544-51, 2001; Danielsa et al, Peptides 22:483-91, 2001; Hinney et al, J. Clin. Endocrin. Metabol. 84: 1483-86,
1999; Meier et al, Eur. J. Pharmacol. 440:269-79, 2002; Nakazato et al, Nature 409: 194-98, 2001; Haynes et al, Regul. Pept. 104: 153-59, 2002). Small molecule agonists or antagonists ligands of these GPCRs would serve as effective anti-obesity therapeutics.
In addition to modulation of central pathways, GPCRs also play a critical role in regulating energy expenditure in the periphery. For example, selective agonist ligands of β3-adrenergic receptors (AR) induce increase in lipolysis and lipid oxidation in rodents resulting in a decrease in body weight (Arch, Eur. J. Pharmacol. 440: 99-107, 2002). A number of β3-AR agonists are currently being evaluated in clinical trials for their anti-obesity and anti-diabetic effects. In summary, GPCRs constitute an attractive drug target for the development of effective anti-obesity agents.
Inflammatory Diseases
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the immune system and tissues responsive to components of the immune system as well as in the following tissues responsive to mediators of inflammation: liver - liver cirrhosis. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue liver cirrhosis and healthy tissue liver demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of inflammatory diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat inflammatory diseases.
Inflammatory diseases comprise diseases triggered by cellular or non-cellular mediators of the immune system or tissues causing the inflammation of body tissues and subsequently producing an acute or chronic inflammatory condition. Examples for such inflammatory diseases are hypersensitivity reactions of type I - IV, for example but not limited to hypersensitivity diseases of the lung including asthma, atopic diseases, allergic rhinitis or conjunctivitis, angioedema of the lids, hereditary angioedema, antireceptor hypersensitivity reactions and autoimmune diseases, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Goodpasture's syndrome, pemphigus, myasthenia gravis, Grave's and Raynaud's disease, type B insulin- resistant diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, Crohn's disease, scleroderma, mixed connective tissue disease, polymyositis, sarcoidosis, glomerulonephritis, acute or chronic host versus graft reactions.
Hematological Disorders
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the hematological system: thrombocytes. The expression in the above mentioned tissues demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of hematological diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat hematological disorders.
Hematological disorders comprise diseases of the blood and all its constituents as well as diseases of organs involved in the generation or degradation of the blood. They include but are not limited to 1) Anemias, 2) Myeloproliferative Disorders, 3) Hemorrhagic Disorders, 4) Leukopenia, 5) Eosinophilic Disorders, 6) Leukemias, 7)
Lymphomas, 8) Plasma Cell Dyscrasias, 9) Disorders of the Spleen in the course of hematological disorders, Disorders according to 1) include, but are not limited to anemias due to defective or deficient hem synthesis, deficient erythropoiesis. Disorders according to 2) include, but are not limited to polycythemia vera, tumor-associated erythrocytosis, myelofibrosis, thrombocythemia. Disorders according to 3) include, but are not limited to vasculitis, thrombocytopenia, heparin-induced thrombocytopenia, thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, hemolytic-uremic syndrome, hereditary and aquired disorders of platelet function, hereditary coagulation disorders. Disorders according to 4) include, but are not limited to neutropenia, lymphocytopenia. Disorders according to 5) include, but are not limited to hypereosinophilia, idiopathic hypereosinophilic syndrome. Disorders according to 6) include, but are not limited to acute myeloic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, myelodysplastic syndrome. Disorders according to 7) include, but are not limited to Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, Burkitt's lymphoma, mycosis fungoides cutaneous T-cell lymphoma. Disorders according to 8) include, but are not limited to multiple myeloma, macroglobulinemia, heavy chain diseases.
In extension of the preceding idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura, iron deficiency anemia, megaloblastic anemia (vitamin B12 deficiency), aplastic anemia, thalassemia, , malignant lymphoma bone marrow invasion, malignant lymphoma skin invasion, haemolytic uraemic syndrome, giant platelet disease are considered to be hematological diseases too.
Neurological Disorders
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following brain tissues: brain, alzheimer brain, frontal lobe, alzheimer brain frontal lobe, dorsal root ganglia. The expression in brain tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue alzheimer brain and healthy tissue brain, between diseased tissue alzheimer brain frontal lobe and healthy tissue frontal lobe demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose nervous system diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat nervous system diseases. CNS disorders include disorders of the central nervous system as well as disorders of the peripheral nervous system. CNS disorders include, but are not limited to brain injuries, cerebrovascular diseases and their consequences, Parkinson's disease, corticobasal degeneration, motor neuron disease, dementia, including ALS, multiple sclerosis, traumatic brain injury, stroke, post-stroke, post-traumatic brain injury, and small-vessel cerebrovascular disease. Dementias, such as Alzheimer's disease, vascular dementia, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia and Parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17, frontotemporal dementias, including Pick's disease, progressive nuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, Huntington's disease, thalamic degeneration, Creutzfeld-Jakob dementia, HIV dementia, schizophrenia with dementia, and Korsakoff s psychosis, within the meaning of the invention are also considered to be CNS disorders.
Similarly, cognitive-related disorders, such as mild cognitive impairment, age-associated memory impairment, age-related cognitive decline, vascular cognitive impairment, attention deficit disorders, attention deficit hyperactivity disorders, and memory disturbances in children with learning disabilities are also considered to be CNS disorders.
Pain, within the meaning of the invention, is also considered to be a CNS disorder. Pain can be associated with CNS disorders, such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemorrhage, vascular malformation). Non-central neuropathic pain includes that associated with post mastectomy pain, phantom feeling, reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD), trigeminal neuralgiaradioculopathy, post-surgical pain, HIV/AIDS related pain, cancer pain, metabolic neuropathies (e.g., diabetic neuropathy, vasculitic neuropathy secondary to connective tissue disease), paraneoplastic polyneuropathy associated, for example, with carcinoma of lung, or leukemia, or lymphoma, or carcinoma of prostate, colon or stomach, trigeminal neuralgia, cranial neuralgias, and post-herpetic neuralgia. Pain associated with peripheral nerve damage, central pain (i.e. due to cerebral ischemia) and various chronic pain i.e., lumbago, back pain (low back pain), inflammatory and/or rheumatic pain. Headache pain (for example, migraine with aura, migraine without aura, and other migraine disorders), episodic and chronic tension-type headache, tension-type like headache, cluster headache, and chronic paroxysmal hemicrania are also CNS disorders.Visceral pain such as pancreatits, intestinal cystitis, dysmenorrhea, irritable Bowel syndrome, Crohn's disease, biliary colic, ureteral colic, myocardial infarction and pain syndromes of the pelvic cavity, e.g., vulvodynia, orchialgia, urethral syndrome and protatodynia are also CNS disorders. Also considered to be a disorder of the nervous system are acute pain, for example postoperative pain, and pain after trauma.
Respiratory Diseases
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the respiratory system: lung, lung tumor. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue lung tumor and healthy tissue lung demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of respiratory diseases. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat those diseases.
Allergy is a complex process in which environmental antigens induce clinically adverse reactions. Asthma can be understood as an basically allergic disease of the lung and its tissues. The asthma inducing antigens, called allergens, typically elicit a specific IgE response and, although in most cases the allergens themselves have little or no intrinsic toxicity, they induce pathology when the IgE response in turn elicits an IgE-dependent or T cell-dependent hypersensitivity reaction. Hypersensitivity reactions can be local or systemic and typically occur within minutes after allergen exposure in individuals who have previously been sensitized to the respective allergen. The hypersensitivity reaction of allergy develops when the allergen is recognized by IgE antibodies bound to specific receptors on the surface of effector cells, such as mast cells, basophils, or eosinophils, which causes the activation of the effector cells and the release of mediators that produce the acute signs and symptoms of the reactions. Allergic diseases include asthma, allergic rhinitis (hay fever), atopic dermatitis, and anaphylaxis.
Asthma is though to arise as a result of interactions between multiple genetic and environmental factors and is characterized by three major features: 1) intermittent and reversible airway obstruction caused by bronchoconstriction, increased mucus production, and thickening of the walls of the airways that leads to a narrowing of the airways, 2) airway hyperresponsiveness, and 3) airway inflammation. Certain cells are critical to the inflammatory reaction of asthma and they include T cells and antigen presenting cells, B cells that produce IgE, and mast cells, basophils, eosinophils, and other cells that bind IgE. These effector cells accumulate at the site of allergic reaction in the airways and release toxic products that contribute to the acute pathology and eventually to tissue destruction related to the disorder. Other resident cells, such as smooth muscle cells, lung epithelial cells, mucus-producing cells, and nerve cells may also be abnormal in individuals with asthma and may contribute to its pathology. While the airway obstruction of asthma, presenting clinically as an intermittent wheeze and shortness of breath, is generally the most pressing symptom of the disease requiring immediate treatment, the inflammation and tissue destruction associated with the disease can lead to irreversible changes that eventually makes asthma a chronic and disabling disorder requiring long-term management.
Despite recent important advances in our understanding of the pathophysiology of allergies and asthma, they appear to be increasing in prevalence and severity [Cawkwell et al. (1993)]. It is estimated that 30-40% of the population suffer with atopic allergy, and 15% of children and 5%> of adults in the population suffer from asthma. Thus, an enormous burden is placed on our health care resources. However, both diagnosis and treatment of asthma are difficult. The severity of lung tissue inflammation is not easy to measure and the symptoms of the disease are often indistinguishable from those of respiratory infections, chronic respiratory inflammatory disorders, allergic rhinitis, or other respiratory disorders. Often, the inciting allergen cannot be determined, making removal of the causative environmental agent difficult. Current pharmacological treatments suffer their own set of disadvantages. Commonly used therapeutic agents, such as beta agonists, can act as symptom relievers to transiently improve pulmonary function, but do not affect the underlying inflammation. Agents that can reduce the underlying inflammation, such as anti-inflammatory steroids, may have major drawbacks which range from immunosuppression to bone loss. In addition, many of the present therapies, such as inhaled corticosteroids, are short-lasting, inconvenient to use, and must be used often on a regular, in some cases lifelong basis, making failure of patients to comply with the treatment a major problem and thereby reducing their effectiveness as a treatment. Because of the problems associated with conventional therapies, alternative treatment strategies have been evaluated. Glycophorin A, cyclosporin and a nonapeptide fragment of IL-2 all inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation; however, they are known to have many other effects. For example, cyclosporin is used as a immunosuppressant after organ transplantation. While these agents may represent alternatives to steroids in the treatment of asthmatics, they inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation and potentially critical immune functions associated with homeostasis. Other treatments that block the release or activity of mediators of bronchoconstriction, such as cromones or anti-leukotrienes, have recently been introduced for the treatment of mild asthma, but they are expensive and not effective in all patients and it is unclear whether they affect the chronic changes associated with asthmatic inflammation at all. What is needed in the art is the identification of a treatment that can act on pathways critical to the development of asthma and that both blocks the episodic attacks of the disorder and which dampens the hyperactive allergic immune response without immunocompromising the patient.
Chronic obstructive pulmonary (or airways) disease (COPD) is a condition defined physiologically as airflow obstruction that generally results from a mixture of emphysema and peripheral airway obstruction due to chronic bronchitis [Botstein et al. (1980)]. Emphysema is characterised by destruction of alveolar walls leading to abnormal enlargement of the air spaces of the lung. Chronic bronchitis is defined clinically as the presence of chronic productive cough for three months in each of two successive years. In COPD, airflow obstruction is usually progressive and is only partially reversible. By far the most important risk factor for development of COPD is cigarette smoking, although the disease does also occur in non-smokers.
Chronic inflammation of the airways is a key pathological feature of COPD. The inflammatory cell population comprises increased numbers of macrophages, neutrophils and CD8+ lymphocyes. Inhaled irritants such as cigarette smoke activate macrophages resident in the respiratory tract as well as epithelial cells leading to release of chemokines (e.g., interleukin-8) and other chemotactic factors which act to increase the neutrophil monocyte trafficking from the blood into lung tissue and airways. Neutrophils and monocytes recruited into the airways can release a variety of potentially damaging mediators such as proteolytic enzymes and reactive oxygen species. Matrix degradation and emphysema, along with airway wall thickening, surfactant dysfunction and mucus hypersecretion are all potential sequelae of this inflammatory response that lead to impaired airflow and gas exchange.
Reproduction Disorders
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following tissues of the reproduction system: breast, breast tumor. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue breast tumor and healthy tissue breast demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of reproduction disorders. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone can be modulated to treat reproduction disorders.
Disorders of the male reproductive system include but are not limited to balanoposthitis, balanitis xerotica obliterans, phimosis, paraphimosis, erythroplasia of Queyrat, skin cancer of the penis, Bowen's and Paget's diseases, syphilis, herpes simplex infections, genital warts, molluscum contagiosum, priapism, peyronie's disease, benign prostatic hypeφlasia (BPH), prostate cancer, prostatitis, testicular cancer, testicular torsion, inguinal hernia, epididymo-orchitis, mumps, hydroceles, spermatoceles, or varicoceles. Impotence (erectile dysfunction) may results from vascular impairment, neurologic disorders, drugs, abnormalities of the penis, or psychologic problems.
Examples of disorders of the female reproductive include premature menopause, pelvic pain, vaginitis, vulvitis, vulvovaginitis, pelvic inflammatory disease, fibroids, menstrual disorders (premenstrual syndrome (PMS), dysmenorrhea, amenorrhea, primary amenorrhea, secondary amenorrhea, menorrhagia, hypomenorrhea, poly- menorrhea, oligomenorrhea, metrorrhagia, menometrorrhagia, Postmenopausal bleeding), bleeding caused by a physical disorder, dysfunctional uterine bleeding, polycystic ovary syndrome (Stein-Leventhal syndrome), endometriosis, cancer of the uterus, cancer of the cervix, cancer of the ovaries, cancer of the vulva, cancer of the vagina, cancer of the fallopian tubes, hydatidiform mole,
Infertility may be caused by problems with sperm, ovulation, the fallopian tubes, and the cervix as well as unidentified factors.
Complications of pregnancy include miscarriage and stillbirth, ectopic pregnancy, anemia, Rh incompatibility, problems with the placenta, excessive vomiting, preeclampsia, eclampsia, and skin rashes (e.g. heφes gestationis, urticaria of pregnancy) as well as preterm labor and premature rupture of the membranes.
Breast disorders may be noncancerous (benign) or cancerous (malignant). Examples of breast disorders are but are not limited to breast pain, cysts, fibrocystic breast disease, fibrous lumps, nipple discharge, breast infection, breast cancer (ductal carcinoma, lobular carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, and inflammatory breast cancer), Paget's disease of the nipple or Cystosarcoma phyllodes. Urologic Disorders
The human growth hormone-releasing hormone is highly expressed in the following uro logical tissues: coφus cavernosum, kidney, kidney tumor. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue kidney tumor and healthy tissue kidney demonstrates that the human growth hormone-releasing hormone or mRNA can be utilized to diagnose of urological disorders. Additionally the activity of the human growth hormone- releasing hormone can be modulated to treat urological disorders.
Genitourological disorders comprise benign and malign disorders of the organs constituting the genitourological system of female and male, renal diseases like acute or chronic renal failure, immunologically mediated renal diseases like renal transplant rejection, lupus nephritis, immune complex renal diseases, glomerulopathies, nephritis, toxic nephropathy, obstructive uropathies like benign prostatic hypeφlasia (BPH), neurogenic bladder syndrome, urinary incontinence like urge-, stress-, or overflow incontinence, pelvic pain, and erectile dysfunction.
This invention further pertains to the use of novel agents identified by the screening assays described above. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to use a test compound identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent identified as described herein (e.g., a modulating agent, an antisense nucleic acid molecule, a specific antibody, ribozyme, or a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide binding molecule) can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
A reagent which affects growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor activity can be administered to a human cell, either in vitro or in vivo, to reduce growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor activity. The reagent preferably binds to an expression product of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene. If the expression product is a protein, the reagent is preferably an antibody. For treatment of human cells ex vivo, an antibody can be added to a preparation of stem cells that have been removed from the body. The cells can then be replaced in the same or another human body, with or without clonal propagation, as is known in the art.
In one embodiment, the reagent is delivered using a liposome. Preferably, the liposome is stable in the animal into which it has been administered for at least about 30 minutes, more preferably for at least about 1 hour, and even more preferably for at least about 24 hours. A liposome comprises a lipid composition that is capable of targeting a reagent, particularly a polynucleotide, to a particular site in an animal, such as a human. Preferably, the lipid composition of the liposome is capable of targeting to a specific organ of an animal, such as the lung, liver, spleen, heart brain, lymph nodes, and skin.
A liposome useful in the present invention comprises a lipid composition that is capable of fusing with the plasma membrane of the targeted cell to deliver its contents to the cell. Preferably, the transfection efficiency of a liposome is about 0.5 μg of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 106 cells, more preferably about 1.0 μg of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 106 cells, and even more preferably about 2.0 μg of DNA per 16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 106 cells. Preferably, a liposome is between about 100 and 500 nm, more preferably between about 150 and 450 nm, and even more preferably between about 200 and 400 nm in diameter.
Suitable liposomes for use in the present invention include those liposomes standardly used in, for example, gene delivery methods known to those of skill in the art. More preferred liposomes include liposomes having a polycationic lipid composition and/or liposomes having a cholesterol backbone conjugated to polyethylene glycol. Optionally, a liposome comprises a compound capable of targeting the liposome to a particular cell type, such as a cell-specific ligand exposed on the outer surface of the liposome.
Complexing a liposome with a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme can be achieved using methods that are standard in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent 5,705,151). Preferably, from about 0.1 μg to about 10 μg of polynucleotide is combined with about 8 nmol of liposomes, more preferably from about 0.5 μg to about 5 μg of polynucleotides are combined with about 8 nmol liposomes, and even more preferably about 1.0 μg of polynucleotides is combined with about 8 nmol liposomes.
In another embodiment, antibodies can be delivered to specific tissues in vivo using receptor-mediated targeted delivery. Receptor-mediated DNA delivery techniques are taught in, for example, Findeis et al Trends in Biotechnol. 11, 202-05 (1993); Chiou et al, GENE THERAPEUTICS: METHODS AND APPLICATIONS OF DIRECT GENE
TRANSFER (J.A. Wolff, ed.) (1994); Wu & Wu, J. Biol. Chem. 263, 621-24 (1988); Wu et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269, 542-46 (1994); Zenke et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87, 3655-59 (1990); Wu et al, J. Biol. Chem. 266, 338-42 (1991).
Determination of a therapeutically effective dose
The determination of a therapeutically effective dose is well within the capability of those skilled in the art. A therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of active ingredient which increases or decreases functional activity relative to the functional activity which occurs in the absence of the therapeutically effective dose.
For any compound, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially either in cell culture assays or in animal models, usually mice, rabbits, dogs, or pigs. The animal model also can be used to determine the appropriate concentration range and route of administration. Such information can then be used to determine useful doses and routes for administration in humans. Therapeutic efficacy and toxicity, e.g., ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population) and LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population), can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals. The dose ratio of toxic to therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index, and it can be expressed as the ratio, LD50/ED o.
Pharmaceutical compositions that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. The data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies is used in formulating a range of dosage for human use. The dosage contained in such compositions is preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage varies within this range depending upon the dosage form employed, sensitivity of the patient, and the route of administration.
The exact dosage will be determined by the practitioner, in light of factors related to the subject that requires treatment. Dosage and administration are adjusted to provide sufficient levels of the active ingredient or to maintain the desired effect.
Factors that can be taken into account include the severity of the disease state, general health of the subject, age, weight, and gender of the subject, diet, time and frequency of administration, drug combination(s), reaction sensitivities, and tolerance/response to therapy. Long-acting pharmaceutical compositions can be administered every 3 to 4 days, every week, or once every two weeks depending on the half-life and clearance rate of the particular formulation.
Normal dosage amounts can vary from 0.1 to 100,000 micrograms, up to a total dose of about 1 g, depending upon the route of administration. Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature and generally available to practitioners in the art. Those skilled in the art will employ different formulations for nucleotides than for proteins or their inhibitors. Similarly, delivery of polynucleotides or polypeptides will be specific to particular cells, conditions, locations, etc. If the reagent is a single-chain antibody, polynucleotides encoding the antibody can be constructed and introduced into a cell either ex vivo or in vivo using well- established techniques including, but not limited to, transferrin-polycation-mediated DNA transfer, transfection with naked or encapsulated nucleic acids, liposome- mediated cellular fusion, intracellular transportation of DNA-coated latex beads, protoplast fusion, viral infection, electroporation, "gene gun," and DEAE- or calcium phosphate-mediated transfection.
Effective in vivo dosages of an antibody are in the range of about 5 μg to about 50 μg/kg, about 50 μg to about 5 mg/kg, about 100 μg to about 500 μg/kg of patient body weight, and about 200 to about 250 μg/kg of patient body weight. For administration of polynucleotides encoding single-chain antibodies, effective in vivo dosages are in the range of about 100 ng to about 200 ng, 500 ng to about 50 mg, about 1 μg to about 2 mg, about 5 μg to about 500 μg, and about 20 μg to about 100 μg of DNA.
If the expression product is mRNA, the reagent is preferably an antisense oligonucleotide or a ribozyme. Polynucleotides that express antisense oligonucleotides or ribozymes can be introduced into cells by a variety of methods, as described above.
Preferably, a reagent reduces expression of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene or the activity of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100%) relative to the absence of the reagent. The effectiveness of the mechanism chosen to decrease the level of expression of a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor gene or the activity of a human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptide can be assessed using methods well known in the art, such as hybridization of nucleotide probes to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-specific mRNA, quantitative RT-PCR, immunologic detection of a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide, or measurement of functional activity. In any of the embodiments described above, any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in combination with other appropriate therapeutic agents. Selection of the appropriate agents for use in combination therapy can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art, according to conventional pharmaceutical principles. The combination of therapeutic agents can act synergistically to effect the treatment or prevention of the various disorders described above. Using this approach, one may be able to achieve therapeutic efficacy with lower dosages of each agent, thus reducing the potential for adverse side effects.
Any of the therapeutic methods described above can be applied to any subject in need of such therapy, including, for example, mammals such as dogs, cats, cows, horses, rabbits, monkeys, and most preferably, humans.
Diagnostic methods
Human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor also can be used in diagnostic assays for detecting diseases and abnormalities or susceptibility to diseases and abnormalities related to the presence of mutations in the nucleic acid sequences that encode the protein. For example, differences can be determined between the cDNA or genomic sequence encoding growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor in individuals afflicted with a disease and in normal individuals. If a mutation is observed in some or all of the afflicted individuals but not in normal individuals, then the mutation is likely to be the causative agent of the disease.
Sequence differences between a reference gene and a gene having mutations can be revealed by the direct DNA sequencing method. In addition, cloned DNA segments can be employed as probes to detect specific DNA segments. The sensitivity of this method is greatly enhanced when combined with PCR. For example, a sequencing primer can be used with a double-stranded PCR product or a single-stranded template molecule generated by a modified PCR. The sequence determination is performed by conventional procedures using radiolabeled nucleotides or by automatic sequencing procedures using fluorescent tags. Genetic testing based on DNA sequence differences can be carried out by detection of alteration in electrophoretic mobility of DNA fragments in gels with or without denaturing agents. Small sequence deletions and insertions can be visualized, for example, by high resolution gel electrophoresis. DNA fragments of different sequences can be distinguished on denaturing formamide gradient gels in which the mobilities of different DNA fragments are retarded in the gel at different positions according to their specific melting or partial melting temperatures (see, e.g., Myers et al, Science 230, 1242, 1985). Sequence changes at specific locations can also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and S 1 protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g., Cotton et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85, 4397-4401, 1985). Thus, the detection of a specific DNA sequence can be performed by methods such as hybridization, RNase protection, chemical cleavage, direct DNA sequencing or the use of restriction enzymes and Southern blotting of genomic DNA. In addition to direct methods such as gel-electrophoresis and DNA sequencing, mutations can also be detected by in situ analysis.
Altered levels of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor also can be detected in various tissues. Assays used to detect levels of the receptor polypeptides in a body sample, such as blood or a tissue biopsy, derived from a host are well known to those of skill in the art and include radioimmunoassays, competitive binding assays, Western blot analysis, and ELISA assays.
All patents and patent applications cited in this disclosure are expressly incoφorated herein by reference. The above disclosure generally describes the present invention.
A more complete understanding can be obtained by reference to the following specific examples, which are provided for puφoses of illustration only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. EXAMPLE 1
Detection of human GPCR activity
The polynucleotide of SEQ ID NO: 3 is inserted into the expression vector pCEV4 and the expression vector pCEV4 GPCR polypeptide obtained is transfected into human embryonic kidney 293 cells. The cells are scraped from a culture flask into 5 ml of Tris HC1, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication. Cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 φm for 5 minutes at 4°C. The supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 minutes at 4°C. The pellet is suspended in binding buffer containing 50 mM Tris HC1, 5 mM MgSO4, 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl, pH 7.5, supplemented with 0.1% BSA, 2 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 mg/ml phosphoramidon. Optimal membrane suspension dilutions, defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10%> of an added radioligand are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing ligand, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 ml.
In equilibrium saturation binding assays, membrane preparations are incubated in the presence of increasing concentrations (0.1 nM to 4 nM) of 125I ligand.
Binding reaction mixtures are incubated for one hour at 30°C. The reaction is stopped by filtration through GF/B filters treated with 0.5% polyethyleneimine, using a cell harvester. Radioactivity is measured by scintillation counting, and data are analyzed by a computerized non-linear regression program. Non-specific binding is defined as the amount of radioactivity remaining after incubation of membrane protein in the presence of 100 nM of unlabeled peptide. Protein concentration is measured by the Bradford method using Bio-Rad Reagent, with bovine serum albumin as a standard. The GPCR activity of the polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ LO NO: 2 is demonstrated. EXAMPLE 2
Expression Profiling
Total cellular RNA was isolated from cells by one of two standard methods:
1) guanidine isothiocyanate/Cesium chloride density gradient centrifugation [Kellogg et al. (1990)]; or with the Tri-Reagent protocol according to the manufacturer's specificati ons (Molecular Research Center, Inc., Cincinatti, Ohio). Total RNA prepared by the Tri-reagent protocol was treated with DNAse I to remove genomic DNA contamination.
For relative quantitation of the mRNA distribution of the human growth hormone- releasing hormone, total RNA from each cell or tissue source was first reverse transcribed. 85 μg of total RNA was reverse transcribed using 1 μmole random hexamer primers, 0.5 mM each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP and dTTP (Qiagen, Hilden,
Germany), 3000 U RnaseQut (Invitrogen, Groningen, Netherlands) in a final volume of 680 μl. The first strand synthesis buffer and Omniscript reverse transcriptase (2 U/μl) were from (Qiagen, Hilden, Germany). The reaction was incubated at 37°C for 90 minutes and cooled on ice. The volume was adjusted to 6800 μl with water, yielding a final concentration of 12.5 ng/μl of starting RNA.
For relative quantitation of the distribution of the human growth hormone-releasing hormone mRNA in cells and tissues the Applied Biosystems 7900HT Sequence Detection system was used according to the manufacturer's specifications and protocols. PCR reactions were set up to quantitate the human growth hormone- releasing hormone and the housekeeping genes HPRT (hypoxanthine phosphoribo- syltransferase), GAPDH (glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase), β-actin, and others. Forward and reverse primers and probes for the human growth hormone- releasing hormone were designed using the Perkin Elmer ABI Primer Express™ software and were synthesized by TibMolBiol (Berlin, Germany). The human growth hormone-releasing hormone forward primer sequence was: Primerl (SEQ ID NO: 7). The human growth hormone-releasing hormone reverse primer sequence was Primer2 (SEQ ID NO: 8). Probel (SEQ ID NO: 9), labelled with FAM (carboxy- fluorescein succinimidyl ester) as the reporter dye and TAMRA (carboxytetra- methylrhodamine) as the quencher, is used as a probe for the human growth hormone-releasing hormone. The following reagents were prepared in a total of 25 μl : lx TaqMan buffer A, 5.5 mM MgCl 2, 200 nM of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dUTP, 0.025 U/μl AmpliTaq Gold ™, 0.01 U/ μl AmpErase and Probel (SEQ ID NO: 4), human growth hormone-releasing hormone forward and reverse primers each at 200 nM, human growth hormone-releasing hormone FAM/TAMRA-labelled probe, and 5 μl of template cDNA. Thermal cycling parameters were 2 min at 50°C, followed by 10 min at 95 °C, followed by 40 cycles of melting at 95 °C for 15 sec and annealing/extending at 60°C for 1 min.
Calculation of corrected CT values
The CT (threshold cycle) value is calculated as described in the "Quantitative determination of nucleic acids" section. The CF-value (factor for threshold cycle correction) is calculated as follows:
1. PCR reactions were set up to quantitate the housekeeping genes (HKG) for each cDNA sample.
2. CTHKG- values (threshold cycle for housekeeping gene) were calculated as described in the "Quantitative determination of nucleic acids" section.
3. CTHκG-mean values (CT mean value of all HKG tested on one cDNAs) of all
HKG for each cDNA are calculated (n = number of HKG):
CTHκG-n-mean value = (CTHKGI -value + CTHκG2-value + ... + CTHKG-Π- value) / n
4. CTpannei mean value (CT mean value ofall HKG in all tested cDNAs) =
(CTHKGI -mean value + CTHKG2- ean value + ...+ CTHKG-y-mean value) / y (y = number of cDNAs) 5. CFCDNA-n (correction factor for cDNA n) = CTpanneι-mean value - CTHKG-Π- mean value
6. CTCDNA-n (CT value of the tested gene for the cDNA n) + CFCDNA-Π (correction factor for cDNA n) = CT COΓ-CDNA-Π (corrected CT value for a gene on cDNA n)
Calculation of relative expression
Definition : highest CTcor-cDNA-n ≠ 40 is defined as CTcor-cDNA [high]
Relative Expression = 2 (CTcor-cDNA[hi8h] " C COΓ-CDNA-Π)
Human Tissues
fetal heart, heart, pericardium, heart atrium (right), heart atrium (left), heart ventricle
(left), interventricular septum, fetal aorta, aorta, artery, coronary artery, vein, coronary artery smooth muscle primary cells, HUVEC cells, skin, adrenal gland, thyroid, thyroid tumor, pancreas, pancreas liver cirrhosis, esophagus, esophagus tumor, stomach, stomach tumor, colon, colon tumor, small intestine, ileum, ileum tumor, ileum chronic inflammation, rectum, salivary gland, fetal liver, liver, liver liver cirrhosis, liver tumor, HEP G2 cells, leukocytes (peripheral blood), Jurkat (T-cells), bone marrow, erythrocytes, lymphnode, thymus, thrombocytes, bone marrow CD71+ cells, bone marrow CD34+ cells, bone marrow CD15+ cells, cord blood CD71+ cells, spleen, spleen liver cirrhosis, skeletal muscle, adipose, fetal brain, brain, alzheimer brain, cerebellum, cerebellum (right), cerebellum (left), cerebral cortex, alzheimer cerebral cortex, frontal lobe, alzheimer brain frontal lobe, occipital lobe, parietal lobe, temporal lobe, precentral gyrus, postcentral gyrus, tonsilla cerebelli , vermis cerebelli, pons, substantia nigra, cerebral meninges, cerebral peduncles, coφus callosum, hippocampus, thalamus, dorsal root ganglia, spinal cord, neuroblastoma SK-N-MC cells, neuroblastoma SH-SY5Y cells, neuroblastoma
IMR32 cells, retina, fetal lung, fetal lung fibroblast IMR-90 cells, lung, lung tumor, lung COPD, trachea, cervix, testis, HeLa cells (cervix tumor), placenta, uterus, uterus tumor, ovary tumor, breast, breast tumor, MDA MB 231 cells (breast tumor), mammary gland, prostata, prostate BPH, bladder, penis, coφus cavernosum, fetal kidney, kidney, kidney tumor, HEK 293 cells
Expression Profile
The results of the mRNA-quantification (expression profiling) is shown in Table 1
Table 1:
Figure imgf000072_0001
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000075_0001
EXAMPLE 3
Expression of recombinant human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
The Pichia pastoris expression vector pPICZB (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) is used to produce large quantities of recombinant human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides in yeast. The growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-encoding DNA sequence is derived from SEQ ID NO: 1. Before insertion into vector pPICZB, the DNA sequence is modified by well known methods in such a way that it contains at its 5 '-end an initiation codon and at its 3 '-end an enterokinase cleavage site, a His6 reporter tag and a termination codon. Moreover, at both termini recognition sequences for restriction endonucleases are added and after digestion of the multiple cloning site of pPICZ B with the corresponding restriction enzymes the modified DNA sequence is ligated into pPICZB. This expression vector is designed for inducible expression in Pichia pastoris, driven by a yeast promoter.
The resulting pPICZ/md-His6 vector is used to transform the yeast.
The yeast is cultivated under usual conditions in 5 liter shake flasks and the recombinantly produced protein isolated from the culture by affinity chromatography (Ni-NTA-Resin) in the presence of 8 M urea. The bound polypeptide is eluted with buffer, pH 3.5, and neutralized. Separation of the polypeptide from the His6 reporter tag is accomplished by site-specific proteolysis using enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) according to manufacturer's instructions. Purified human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is obtained.
EXAMPLE 4
Identification of test compounds that bind to growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides
Purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptides comprising a glutathione-S-transferase protein and absorbed onto glutathione-derivatized wells of 96-well microtiter plates are contacted with test compounds from a small molecule library at pH 7.0 in a physiological buffer solution. Human growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides comprise the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2. The test compounds comprise a fluorescent tag. The samples are incubated for 5 minutes to one hour. Control samples are incubated in the absence of a test compound.
The buffer solution containing the test compounds is washed from the wells. Binding of a test compound to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide is detected by fluorescence measurements of the contents of the wells. A test compound that increases the fluorescence in a well by at least 15% relative to fluorescence of a well in which a test compound is not incubated is identified as a compound which binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
EXAMPLE 5
Identification of a test compound which decreases growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene expression
A test compound is administered to a culture of human cells transfected with a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor expression construct and incubated at 37°C for 10 to 45 minutes. A culture of the same type of cells that have not been transfected is incubated for the same time without the test compound to provide a negative control.
RNA is isolated from the two cultures as described in Chirgwin et al, Biochem. 18, 5294-99, 1979). Northern blots are prepared using 20 to 30 μg total RNA and hybridized with a 32P-labeled growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-specific probe at 65°C in Express-hyb (CLONTECH). The probe comprises at least 11 contiguous nucleotides selected from the complement of SEQ ID NO: 1. A test compound that decreases the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor-specific signal relative to the signal obtained in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor gene expression.
EXAMPLE 6
Tissue-specific expression of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
The qualitative expression pattern of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor in various tissues is determined by Reverse Transcription-Polymerase Chain Reaction (RT-PCR).
Quantitative expression profiling
To demonstrate that growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is involved in the disease process of diabetes, the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression: subcutaneous and mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone marrow, brain, colon, fetal brain, heart, hypothalamus, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, thyroid, trachea, and uterus. Human islet cells and an islet cell library also are tested. As a final step, the expression of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from diabetic individuals is compared.
To demonstrate that growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor is involved in the disease process of obesity, expression is determined in the following tissues: subcutaneous adipose tissue, mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone marrow, brain (cerebellum, spinal cord, cerebral cortex, caudate, medulla, substantia nigra, and putamen), colon, fetal brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle small intestine, spleen, stomach, testes, thymus, thyroid trachea, and uterus. Neuroblastoma cell lines SK- Nr-Be (2), Hr, Sk-N-As, HTB-10, IMR-32, SNSY-5Y, T3, SK-N-D2, D283, DAOY, CHP-2, U87MG, BE(2)C, T986, KANTS, MO59K, CHP234, C6 (rat), SK-N-F1, SK-PU-DW, PFSK-1, BE(2)M17, and MCIXC also are tested for growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor expression. As a final step, the expression of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from obese individuals is compared.
Quantitative expression profiling is performed by the form of quantitative PCR analysis called "kinetic analysis" firstly described in Higuchi et al, BioTechnology 10, 413-17, 1992, and Higuchi et al, BioTechnology 11, 1026-30, 1993. The principle is that at any given cycle within the exponential phase of PCR, the amount of product is proportional to the initial number of template copies.
If the amplification is performed in the presence of an internally quenched fluorescent oligonucleotide (TaqMan probe) complementary to the target sequence, the probe is cleaved by the 5 '-3' endonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase and a fluorescent dye released in the medium (Holland et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 7276-80, 1991). Because the fluorescence emission will increase in direct proportion to the amount of the specific amplified product, the exponential growth phase of PCR product can be detected and used to determine the initial template concentration (Heid et al, Genome Res. 6, 986-94, 1996, and Gibson et al, Genome
Res. 6, 995-1001, 1996).
The amplification of an endogenous control can be performed to standardize the amount of sample RNA added to a reaction. In this kind of experiment, the control of choice is the 18S ribosomal RNA. Because reporter dyes with differing emission spectra are available, the target and the endogenous control can be independently quantified in the same tube if probes labeled with different dyes are used. All "real time PCR" measurements of fluorescence are made in the ABI Prism 7700.
RNA extraction and cDNA preparation. Total RNA from the tissues listed above are used for expression quantification. RNAs labeled "from autopsy" were extracted from autoptic tissues with the TRIzol reagent (Life Technologies, MD) according to the manufacturer's protocol.
Fifty μg of each RNA were treated with DNase I for 1 hour at 37°C in the following reaction mix: 0.2 U/μl RNase-free DNase I (Roche Diagnostics, Germany); 0.4 U/μl
RNase inhibitor (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.9; 10 mM MgCl2; 50 mM NaCl; and 1 mM DTT.
After incubation, RNA is extracted once with 1 volume of phenolxhloroform:- isoamyl alcohol (24:24:1) and once with chloroform, and precipitated with 1/10 volume of 3 M sodium acetate, pH 5.2, and 2 volumes of ethanol.
50 μg of each RNA from the autoptic tissues are DNase treated with the DNA-free kit purchased from Ambion (Ambion, TX). After resuspension and spectro- photometric quantification, each sample is reverse transcribed with the TaqMan
Reverse Transcription Reagents (PE Applied Biosystems, CA) according to the manufacturer's protocol. The final concentration of RNA in the reaction mix is 200 ng/μl. Reverse transcription is carried out with 2.5 μM of random hexamer primers.
TaqMan quantitative analysis. Specific primers and probe are designed according to the recommendations of PE Applied Biosystems; the probe can be labeled at the 5' end FAM (6-carboxy-fluorescein) and at the 3' end with TAMRA (6-carboxy- tetramethyl-rhodamine). Quantification experiments are performed on 10 ng of reverse transcribed RNA from each sample. Each determination is done in triplicate.
Total cDNA content is normalized with the simultaneous quantification (multiplex PCR) of the 18S ribosomal RNA using the Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Reagents (PDAR) Control Kit (PE Applied Biosystems, CA).
The assay reaction mix is as follows: IX final TaqMan Universal PCR Master Mix (from 2 X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from 20 X stock); 300 nM forward primer; 900 nM reverse primer; 200 nM probe; 10 ng cDNA; and water to 25 μl.
Each of the following steps are carried out once: pre PCR, 2 minutes at 50°C, and 10 minutes at 95°C. The following steps are carried out 40 times: denaturation,
15 seconds at 95°C, annealing/extension, 1 minute at 60°C.
The experiment is performed on an ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detector (PE Applied Biosystems, CA). At the end of the run, fluorescence data acquired during PCR are processed as described in the ABI Prism 7700 user's manual in order to achieve better background subtraction as well as signal linearity with the starting target quantity.
EXAMPLE 7
Radioligand binding assays
Human embryonic kidney 293 cells transfected with a polynucleotide which expresses human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor are scraped from a culture flask into 5 ml of Tris HC1, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication.
Cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 φm for 5 minutes at 4°C. The supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 minutes at 4°C. The pellet is suspended in binding buffer containing 50 mM Tris HC1, 5 mM MgSO4, 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl, pH 7.5, supplemented with 0.1% BSA, 2 μg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 μg/ml phosphoramidon. Optimal membrane suspension dilutions, defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10% of the added radioligand, are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing 125I-labeled ligand or test compound, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 μl. In equilibrium saturation binding assays, membrane preparations are incubated in the presence of increasing concentrations (0.1 nM to 4 nM) of 125I-labeled ligand or test compound (specific activity 2200 Ci/mmol). The binding affinities of different test compounds are determined in equilibrium competition binding assays, using 0.1 nM 125I-peptide in the presence of twelve different concentrations of each test compound.
Binding reaction mixtures are incubated for one hour at 30°C. The reaction is stopped by filtration through GF/B filters treated with 0.5% polyethyleneimine, using a cell harvester. Radioactivity is measured by scintillation counting, and data are analyzed by a computerized non-linear regression program.
Non-specific binding is defined as the amount of radioactivity remaining after incubation of membrane protein in the presence of 100 nM of unlabeled peptide.
Protein concentration is measured by the Bradford method using Bio-Rad Reagent, with bovine serum albumin as a standard. A test compound which increases the radioactivity of membrane protein by at least 15% relative to radioactivity of membrane protein which was not incubated with a test compound is identified as a compound which binds to a human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor polypeptide.
EXAMPLE 8
Effect of a test compound on human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor - mediated cyclic AMP formation
Receptor-mediated inhibition of cAMP formation can be assayed in host cells which express human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor. Cells are plated in 96- well plates and incubated in Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline (PBS) supplemented with lO mM HEPES, 5 mM theophylline, 2 μg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 μg/ml phosphoramidon for 20 minutes at 37°C in 5% CO2. A test compound is added and incubated for an additional 10 minutes at 37°C. The medium is aspirated, and the reaction is stopped by the addition of 100 mM HC1. The plates are stored at 4°C for 15 minutes. cAMP content in the stopping solution is measured by radioimmunoassay. Radioactivity is quantified using a gamma counter equipped with data reduction software. A test compound which decreases radioactivity of the contents of a well relative to radioactivity of the contents of a well in the absence of the test compound is identified as a potential inhibitor of cAMP formation. A test compound which increases radioactivity of the contents of a well relative to radioactivity of the contents of a well in the absence of the test compound is identified as a potential enhancer of cAMP formation.
EXAMPLE 9
Effect of a test compound on the mobilization of intracellular calcium
Intracellular free calcium concentration can be measured by microspecfrofluorometry using the fluorescent indicator dye Fura-2/AM (Bush et al., J. Neurochem. 57, 562- 74, 1991). Stably transfected cells are seeded onto a 35 mm culture dish containing a glass coverslip insert. Cells are washed with HBS , incubated with a test compound, and loaded with 100 μl of Fura-2/AM (10 μM) for 20-40 minutes. After washing with HBS to remove the Fura-2/AM solution, cells are equilibrated in HBS for 10- 20 minutes. Cells are then visualized under the 40X objective of a Leitz Fluovert FS microscope.
Fluorescence emission is determined at 510 nM, with excitation wavelengths alternating between 340 nM and 380 nM. Raw fluorescence data are converted to calcium concentrations using standard calcium concentration curves and software analysis techniques. A test compound which increases the fluorescence by at least
15%) relative to fluorescence in the absence of a test compound is identified as a compound which mobilizes intracellular calcium. EXAMPLE 10
Effect of a test compound on phosphoinositide metabolism
Cells which stably express human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor cDNA are plated in 96-well plates and grown to confluence. The day before the assay, the growth medium is changed to 100 μl of medium containing 1%> serum and 0.5 μCi 3H-myinositol. The plates are incubated overnight in a CO2 incubator (5% CO2 at 37°C). Immediately before the assay, the medium is removed and replaced by 200 μl of PBS containing 10 mM LiCl, and the cells are equilibrated with the new medium for 20 minutes. During this interval, cells also are equilibrated with antagonist, added as a 10 μl aliquot of a 20-fold concentrated solution in PBS.
The 3H-inositol phosphate accumulation from inositol phospholipid metabolism is started by adding 10 μml of a solution containing a test compound. To the first well
10 μl are added to measure basal accumulation. Eleven different concentrations of test compound are assayed in the following 11 wells of each plate row. All assays are performed in duplicate by repeating the same additions in two consecutive plate rows.
The plates are incubated in a CO2 incubator for one hour. The reaction is terminated by adding 15 μl of 50% v/v trichloroacetic acid (TCA), followed by a 40 minute incubation at 4°C. After neutralizing TCA with 40 μl of 1 M Tris, the content of the wells is transferred to a Multiscreen HV filter plate (Millipore) containing Dowex AG1-X8 (200-400 mesh, formate form). The filter plates are prepared by adding
200 μl of Dowex AG1-X8 suspension (50% v/v, wateπresin) to each well. The filter plates are placed on a vacuum manifold to wash or elute the resin bed. Each well is washed 2 times with 200 μl of water, followed by 2 x 200 μl of 5 mM sodium tetraborate/60 mM ammonium formate. The 3H-IPs are eluted into empty 96-well plates with 200 μl of 1.2 M ammonium formate/0.1 formic acid. The content of the wells is added to 3 ml of scintillation cocktail, and radioactivity is determined by liquid scintillation counting.
EXAMPLE 11
Receptor Binding Methods
Standard Binding Assays. Binding assays are carried out in a binding buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 0.5% BSA, and 5 mM MgCl2. The standard assay for radioligand binding to membrane fragments comprising growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor polypeptides is carried out as follows in 96 well microtiter plates (e.g., Dynatech Immulon II Removawell plates). Radioligand is diluted in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci to the desired cpm per 50 μl, then 50 μl aliquots are added to the wells. For non-specific binding samples, 5 μl of 40 μM cold ligand also is added per well. Binding is initiated by adding 150 μl per well of membrane diluted to the desired concentration (10-30 μg membrane protein/well) in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci. Plates are then covered with Linbro mylar plate sealers (Flow Labs) and placed on a Dynatech Microshaker II. Binding is allowed to proceed at room temperature for 1-2 hours and is stopped by centrifuging the plate for 15 minutes at 2,000 x g. The supernatants are decanted, and the membrane pellets are washed once by addition of 200 μl of ice cold binding buffer, brief shaking, and recentrifugation. The individual wells are placed in 12 x 75 mm tubes and counted in an LKB Gammamaster counter (78% efficiency). Specific binding by this method is identical to that measured when free ligand is removed by rapid
(3-5 seconds) filtration and washing on polyethyleneimine-coated glass fiber filters.
Three variations of the standard binding assay are also used.
1. Competitive radioligand binding assays with a concentration range of cold ligand vs. 125 I-labeled ligand are carried out as described above with one modification. All dilutions of ligands being assayed are made in 40 X PMSF/Baci to a concentration 40 X the final concentration in the assay. Samples of peptide (5 μl each) are then added per microtiter well. Membranes and radioligand are diluted in binding buffer without protease inhibitors. Radioligand is added and mixed with cold ligand, and then binding is initiated by addition of membranes.
2. Chemical cross-linking of radioligand with receptor is done after a binding step identical to the standard assay. However, the wash step is done with binding buffer minus BSA to reduce the possibility of non-specific cross-linking of radioligand with BSA. The cross-linking step is carried out as described below.
3. Larger scale binding assays to obtain membrane pellets for studies on solubilization of receptoπligand complex and for receptor purification are also carried out. These are identical to the standard assays except that (a) binding is carried out in polypropylene tubes in volumes from 1-250 ml, (b) concentration of membrane protein is always 0.5 mg/ml, and (c) for receptor purification, BSA concentration in the binding buffer is reduced to 0.25%>, and the wash step is done with binding buffer without BSA, which reduces BSA contamination of the purified receptor.
EXAMPLE 12
Chemical Cross-Linking of Radioligand to Receptor
After a radioligand binding step as described above, membrresuspended in 200 μl per microtiter plate well of ice-cold binding buffer without BSA. Then 5 μl per well of 4 mM N-5-azido-2-nitiObenzoyloxysuccinimide (ANB-NOS, Pierce) in DMSO is added and mixed. The samples are held on ice and UV-irradiated for 10 minutes with a Mineralight R-52G lamp (UVP Inc., San Gabriel, Calif.) at a distance of 5-10 cm. Then the samples are transferred to Eppendorf micro fuge tubes, the membranes pelleted by centrifugation, supematants removed, and membranes solubilized in Laemmli SDS sample buffer for polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE). PAGE is carried out as described below. Radiolabeled proteins are visualized by autoradiography of the dried gels with Kodak XAR film and DuPont image intensifier screens.
EXAMPLE 13
Membrane Solubilization
Membrane solubilization is carried out in buffer containing 25 mM Tris, pH 8, 10%> glycerol (w/v) and 0.2 mM CaCl2 (solubilization buffer). The highly soluble detergents including Triton X-100, deoxycholate, deoxycholate:lyso lecithin, CHAPS, and zwittergent are made up in solubilization buffer at 10% concentrations and stored as frozen aliquots. Lysolecithin is made up fresh because of insolubility upon freeze-thawing and digitonin is made fresh at lower concentrations due to its more limited solubility.
To solubilize membranes, washed pellets after the binding step are resuspended free of visible particles by pipetting and vortexing in solubilization buffer at 100,000 x g for 30 minutes. The supematants are removed and held on ice and the pellets are discarded.
EXAMPLE 14
Assay of Solubilized Receptors
After binding of 125I ligands and solubilization of the membranes with detergent, the intact R:L complex can be assayed by four different methods. All are carried out on ice or in a cold room at 4-10°C).
1. Column chromatography (Knuhtsen et al, Biochem. J. 254, 641-647, 1988).
Sephadex G-50 columns (8 x 250 mm) are equilibrated with solubilization buffer containing detergent at the concentration used to solubilize membranes and 1 mg/ml bovine serum albumin. Samples of solubilized membranes (0.2- 0.5 ml) are applied to the columns and eluted at a flow rate of about 0.7 ml/minute. Samples (0.18 ml) are collected. Radioactivity is determined in a gamma counter. Void volumes of the columns are determined by the elution volume of blue dextran. Radioactivity eluting in the void volume is considered bound to protein. Radioactivity eluting later, at the same volume as free 125I ligands, is considered non-bound.
2. Polyethyleneglycol precipitation (Cuatrecasas, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 69, 318-322, 1972). For a 100 μl sample of solubilized membranes in a 12 x 75 mm polypropylene tube, 0.5 ml of 1% (w/v) bovine gamma globulin (Sigma) in 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer is added, followed by 0.5 ml of 25%> (w/v) polyethyleneglycol (Sigma) and mixing. The mixture is held on ice for 15 minutes. Then 3 ml of 0.1 M sodium phosphate, pH 7.4, is added per sample. The samples are rapidly (1-3 seconds) filtered over Whatman GF/B glass fiber filters and washed with 4 ml of the phosphate buffer. PEG- precipitated receptor : I-hgand complex is determined by gamma counting of the filters.
3. GFB/PEI filter binding (Bruns et al, Analytical Biochem. 132, 74-81, 1983).
Whatman GF/B glass fiber filters are soaked in 0.3% polyethyleneimine (PEI, Sigma) for 3 hours. Samples of solubilized membranes (25-100 μl) are replaced in 12 x 75 mm polypropylene tubes. Then 4 ml of solubilization buffer without detergent is added per sample and the samples are immediately filtered through the GFB/PEI filters (1-3 seconds) and washed with 4 ml of solubilization buffer. CPM of receptor : 125 I-ligand complex adsorbed to filters are determined by gamma counting.PAR.4. Charcoal/Dextran (Paul and Said, Peptides 7[Suppl. 77,147-149, 1986). Dextran T70 (0.5 g, Pharmacia) is dissolved in 1 liter of water, then 5 g of activated charcoal (Norit A, alkaline; Fisher Scientific) is added. The suspension is stirred for
10 minutes at room temperature and then stored at 4°C. until use. To measure R:L complex, 4 parts by volume of charcoal/dextran suspension are added to 1 part by volume of solubilized membrane. The samples are mixed and held on ice for 2 minutes and then centrifuged for 2 minutes at 11,000 x g in a Beckman microfuge. Free radioligand is adsorbed charcoal/dextran and is discarded with the pellet. Receptor : 125 I-ligand complexes remain in the supernatant and are determined by gamma counting.
EXAMPLE 15
Receptor Purification
Binding of biotinyl-receptor to GH CI membranes is carried out as described above. Incubations are for 1 hour at room temperature. In the standard purification protocol, the binding incubations contain 10 nM Bio-S29. I ligand is added as a tracer at levels of 5,000-100,000 cpm per mg of membrane protein. Control incubations contain 10 μM cold ligand to saturate the receptor with non-biotinylated ligand.
Solubilization of receptor:ligand complex also is carried out as described above, with 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin in solubilization buffer containing 0.2 mM MgCl2, to obtain 100,000 x g supematants containing solubilized R:L complex.
Immobilized streptavidin (streptavidin cross-linked to 6%> beaded agarose, Pierce Chemical Co.; "SA-agarose") is washed in solubilization buffer and added to the solubilized membranes as 1/30 of the final volume. This mixture is incubated with constant stirring by end-over-end rotation for 4-5 hours at 4-10°C. Then the mixture is applied to a column and the non-bound material is washed through. Binding of radioligand to SA-agarose is determined by comparing cpm in the 100,000 x g supernatant with that in the column effluent after adsoφtion to SA-agarose. Finally, the column is washed with 12-15 column volumes of solubilization buffer+0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin +1/500 (vol/vol) 100 x 4pase.PAR.The streptavidin column is eluted with solubilization buffer + 0.1 mM EDTA + 0.1 mM EGTA +
0.1 mM GTP-gamma-S (Sigma) + 0.15% (wt/vol) deoxycholate:lysolecithin + 1/1000 (vol/vol) 100.times.4pase. First, one column volume of elution buffer is passed through the column and flow is stopped for 20-30 minutes. Then 3-4 more column volumes of elution buffer are passed through. All the eluates are pooled.
Eluates from the streptavidin column are incubated overnight (12-15 hours) with immobilized wheat germ agglutinin (WGA agarose, Vector Labs) to adsorb the receptor via interaction of covalently bound carbohydrate with the WGA lectin. The ratio (vol/vol) of WGA-agarose to streptavidin column eluate is generally 1 :400. A range from 1:1000 to 1 :200 also can be used. After the binding step, the resin is pelleted by centrifugation, the supernatant is removed and saved, and the resin is washed 3 times (about 2 minutes each) in buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 8,
5 mM MgCl2> and 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin. To elute the WGA-bound receptor, the resin is extracted three times by repeated mixing (vortex mixer on low speed) over a 15-30 minute period on ice, with 3 resin columns each time, of 10 mM N-N'-N"-triacetylchitotriose in the same HEPES buffer used to wash the resin. After each elution step, the resin is centrifuged down and the supernatant is carefully removed, free of WGA-agarose pellets. The three, pooled eluates contain the final, purified receptor. The material non-bound to WGA contain G protein subunits specifically eluted from the streptavidin column, as well as non-specific contaminants. All these fractions are stored frozen at -90°C.
EXAMPLE 16
Diabetes: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Glucose Production
Over-production of glucose by the liver, due to an enhanced rate of gluconeogenesis, is the major cause of fasting hyperglycemia in diabetes. Overnight fasted normal rats or mice have elevated rates of gluconeogenesis as do streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats or mice fed ad libitum. Rats are made diabetic with a single intravenous injection of 40 mg/kg of streptozotocin while C57BL/KsJ mice are given 40- 60 mg/kg i.p. for 5 consecutive days. Blood glucose is measured from tail-tip blood and then compounds are administered via different routes (p.o., i.p., i.v., s.c). Blood is collected at various times thereafter and glucose measured. Alternatively, compounds are administered for several days, then the animals are fasted overnight, blood is collected and plasma glucose measured. Compounds that inhibit glucose production will decrease plasma glucose levels compared to the vehicle-treated control group.
Insulin Sensitivity
Both ob/ob and db/db mice as well as diabetic Zucker rats are hyperglycemic, hyperinsulinemic and insulin resistant. The animals are pre-bled, their glucose levels measured, and then they are grouped so that the mean glucose level is the same for each group. Compounds are administered daily either q.d. or b.i.d. by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c.) for 7-28 days. Blood is collected at various times and plasma glucose and insulin levels determined. Compounds that improve insulin sensitivity in these models will decrease both plasma glucose and insulin levels when compared to the vehicle-treated control group.
Insulin Secretion
Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load. When measuring insulin levels, compounds are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c. or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice. At the appropriate time an intravenous glucose load (0.4 g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later. Plasma insulin levels are determined. Compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose. When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or intraperitoneal glucose load (1 g/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60 and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load. When measuring insulin levels, test compounds which regulate growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c, or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice. At the appropriate time an intravenous glucose load (0.4 g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later. Plasma insulin levels are determined. Test compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose. When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or intraperitoneal glucose load (1 g/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60, and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Test compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
EXAMPLE 17
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation for the treatment of obesity
Evaluation of Compound's Efficacy on the Reduction of Body Weight and Food and Water Consumption in Obese Zucker fa/fa Rats
The puφose of this protocol is to determine the effect of chronic administration of an unknown compound on body weight and food and water consumption in obese Zucker fa fa rats. Obese Zucker fa/fa rats are frequently used in the determination of compound efficacy in the reduction of body weight. This animal model has been successfully used in the identification and characterization of the efficacy profile of compounds that are or have been used in the management of body weight in obese humans 1'2> 3> 4 & 5. A typical study include 60-80 male Zucker fa/fa, (n=10/treatment group) with an average body weight of approximately 550 g. Rats are kept in standard animal rooms under controlled temperature and humidity and a 12/12 light dark cycle. Water and food are continuously available. Rats are single housed in large rat shoeboxes containing grid floor. Animals are adapted to the grid floors and sham dosed with study vehicle for at least four days before the recording of two-days baseline measurement of body weight and 24 hr food and water consumption. Rats are assigned to one of 6-8 treatment groups based upon their body weight on baseline. The groups are set up so that the mean and standard error of the mean of body weight were similar.
Animals are orally gavaged (2 ml/kg) daily before the dark phase of the LD/cycle for a pre-determined number of days (typically 8-14 days) with their assigned dose/compound. At this time, body weight, food and water consumption are measured. On the final day, animals are euthanized using CO2 inhalation.
1. Al-Barazanji KA, Arch JR, Buckingham RE and Tadayyon, M. (2000). Central exedin-4 reduces body weight without altering plasma leptin in (fa/fa) Zucker rats. Obes Res. 8 (4), 317-23.
2. Assimacopoulos-Jeannet F, et al., (1991). Effect of a peroxisome proliferator on b-oxidation and iverall energy balance in obese (fa/fa) rats. Am J Physiol, 260 (2 Pt 2):R278-83.
3. Dryden S, Brown M, King P and Williams G. (1999). Decreased plasma leptin in lean and obese Zucker rats after treatment with the serotonin reuptake inhibitor fluoxetine. Horm Metab Res, 31 (6), 363-6.
4. Edwards S and Stevens R. (1994). Effects of chronic systemic administration of 5-HT on food intake and body weight in rats. Pharmacology Biochem Behav. 47 (4), 865-72. 5. Grinker JA, Drewnowski A, Enns M and Kissuleff H (1980). Effects of d- amphetamine and fenfluramine on feeding patterns and activity of obese and lean Zucker rats. Pharmacol Biochem Behav. 12 (2), 265-75.
Evaluation of Compound's Efficacy on the Reduction of Body Weight in Diet- Induced Obese Mice
The puφose of this protocol is to determine the effect of chronic administration of an unknown compound on body weight of mice made obese by exposure to a 45%> kcal/g high fat diet during more than 10 weeks. The body weight of mice selected for the studies is higher than three standard deviations from the weight of a control group of mice fed standard low fat (5-6%> fat) mouse chow. Diet-induced obese (DIO) animals are frequently used in the determination of compound efficacy in the reduction of body weight1' 2' 3' 4. This animal model has been successfully used in the identification and characterization of the efficacy profile of compounds that are or have been used in the management of body weight in obese humans1' 2' 3.
A typical study include 60-80 male C57bl/J6 mice (n=10/treatment group) with an average body weight of approximately 45 g. Mice are kept in standard animal rooms under controlled temperature and humidity and a 12/12 light dark cycle. Water and food are continuously available. Mice are single housed in shoeboxes. Animals are sham dosed with study vehicle for at least four days before the recording of two-days baseline measurement of body weight and 24 hr food and water consumption. Mice are assigned to one of 6-8 treatment groups based upon their body weight on baseline. The groups are set up so that the mean and standard error of the mean of body weight were similar.
Animals are orally gavaged (5ml/kg) daily before the dark phase of the LD/cycle for a pre-determined number of days (typically 8-14 days) with their assigned dose/compound. At this time, body weight, food and water consumption are measured. Data is analyzed using appropriate statistics following the research design. On the final day, animals are euthanized using CO2 inhalation.
1. Brown M, Bing C, King P, Pickavance L, Heal D and Wilding J. (2001). Sibutramine reduces feeding, body fat and improve insulin resistance in dietary-obese Wistar rats independently of hypothalamic neuropeptide Y. British Journal of Pharmacology, 132, 1898-1904.
2. Guerre-Millo m, et al., (2000). Peroxisome Proliferator-activated receptor a activators improve insulin sensitivity and reduce adiposity. The Journal of
Biological Chemistry, 275 (22), 16638-16642.
3. Han LK, Kimura Y and Okuda H. (1999). Reduction in fat storage during chitin-chitosan treatment in mice fed a high-fat diet. Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord, 23 (2) 174-9.
4. Surwit RS, Dixon TM, Petro AE, Daniel KE and Collins S. (2000). Diazoxide restores beta-3 adrenergic receptor function in diet-induced obesity and diabetes. Endocrinology, 141 (10), 3630-7.
Evaluation of Compound's Efficacy on the Reduction of Food Intake in Lean Overnight Fasted Rats
The puφose of this protocol is to determine the effect of a single dose of an unknown compound on food consumption of lean overnight fasted rats. The fasted-refed rat model is frequently used in the field of obesity to identify compounds with potential for anorectic effects. This animal model has been successfully used in the identification and characterization of the efficacy profile of compounds that are or have been used in the management of body weight in obese humans1' 2' 3 & 4.
A typical study includes 60-80 male rats (n=10/treatment group) with an average body weight of approximately 280 g. Rats are kept in standard animal rooms under controlled temperature and humidity and a 12/12 light dark cycle. Rats are single housed in suspended cages with a mesh floor. Water and food are continuously available unless the animals are being fasted for the study.
The efficacy test: The rats are fasted overnight during the dark phase (total of approx.
16-18 hrs). The animal is dosed orally with his assigned treatment (2 mg/ml). One hour after dosing, pre-weighed food jars are returned to the cage. Food intake is recorded 30, 60, 90, 180, 240 minutes post food return. At each time point, spillage is returned to the food jar and then the food jars are weighed. The amount of food consumed is determined for each time point. Difference between treatment group is determined using appropriate statistical analysis.
1. Blavet N DeFeudis FV and Clostre F (1982). Studies on food intake in fasted rat. Gen Pharmacology, 13(4), 293-7.
2. Grignaschi G, Fanelli E, Scagnol I, and Samanin R (1999). Studies on the role of serotonin receptors in the effect of sibutramine in various feeding paradigms in rats. Br. J. Pharmacol., 127(5), 1190-1194.
3. McTavish D and Heel RC. (1992). Dexfenfluramine: A review of its pharmacological properties and therapeutic potential in obesity. Drug. 43 (5), 713-733.
4. Rowland NE, Antelman SM, Bartness TJ (1985). comparison of the effects of fenfluramine and other anorectic agents in different feeding and drinking paradigms in rats. Life Science, 36, 2295-2300. EXAMPLE 18
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation for cancer treatment Acute Mechanistic Assays Reduction in Mitogenic Plasma Hormone Levels
This non-tumor assay measures the ability of a compound to reduce either the endogenous level of a circulating hormone or the level of hormone produced in response to a biologic stimulus. Rodents are administered test compound (p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c). At a predetermined time after administration of test compound, blood plasma is collected. Plasma is assayed for levels of the hormone of interest. If the normal circulating levels of the hormone are too low and/or variable to provide consistent results, the level of the hormone may be elevated by a pre-treatment with a biologic stimulus (i.e., LHRH may be injected i.m. into mice at a dosage of 30 ng/mouse to induce a burst of testosterone synthesis). The timing of plasma collection would be adjusted to coincide with the peak of the induced hormone response. Compound effects are compared to a vehicle-treated control group. An F- test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test. Significance is p value < 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
Hollow Fiber Mechanism of Action Assay
Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol, these may include assays for gene expression (bDNA, PCR, or Taqman), or a specific biochemical activity (i.e., cAMP levels. Results are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p < 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group. Subacute Functional In Vivo Assays
Reduction in Mass of Hormone Dependent Tissues
This is another non-tumor assay that measures the ability of a compound to reduce the mass of a hormone dependent tissue (i.e., seminal vesicles in males and uteri in females). Rodents are administered test compound (p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c.) according to a predetermined schedule and for a predetermined duration (i.e., 1 week). At termination of the study, animals are weighed, the target organ is excised, any fluid is expressed, and the weight of the organ is recorded. Blood plasma may also be collected. Plasma may be assayed for levels of a hormone of interest or for levels of test agent. Organ weights may be directly compared or they may be normalized for the body weight of the animal. Compound effects are compared to a vehicle-treated control group. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test. Significance is p value < 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
Hollow Fiber Proliferation Assay
Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol. Cell proliferation is determined by measuring a marker of cell number (i.e., MTT or LDH). The cell number and change in cell number from the starting inoculum are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p < 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group. Anti-angiogenesis Models
Corneal Angiogenesis
Hydron pellets with or without growth factors or cells are implanted into a micropocket surgically created in the rodent cornea. Compound administration may be systemic or local (compound mixed with growth factors in the hydron pellet). Corneas are harvested at 7 days post implantation immediately following intracardiac infusion of colloidal carbon and are fixed in 10%> formalin. Readout is qualitative scoring and/or image analysis. Qualitative scores are compared by Rank Sum test.
Image analysis data is evaluated by measuring the area of neovascularization (in pixels) and group averages are compared by Student's t-test (2 tail). Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the growth factor or cells only group.
Matrigel A ngiogenesis
Matrigel, containing cells or growth factors, is injected subcutaneously. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. Matrigel plugs are harvested at predetermined time point(s) and prepared for readout. Readout is an ELISA-based assay for hemoglobin concentration and/or histological examination (i.e. vessel count, special staining for endothelial surface markers: CD31, factor-8). Readouts are analyzed by Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an
F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group.
Primary Antitumor Efficacy
Early Therapy Models
Subcutaneous Tumor
Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously on Day 0. Vehicle and/or compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting at a time, usually on Day 1, prior to the ability to measure the tumor burden. Body weights and tumor measurements are recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean net body and tumor weights are calculated for each data collection day. Anti- tumor efficacy may be initially determined by comparing the size of treated (T) and control (C) tumors on a given day by a Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance determined at p <0.05. The experiment may also be continued past the end of dosing in which case tumor measurements would continue to be recorded to momtor tumor growth delay. Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan- Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size.
Significance is p <0.05.
Intraperitoneal/Intracranial Tumor Models
Tumor cells are injected intraperitoneally or intracranially on Day 0. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting on Day 1. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded twice daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Morbidity/mortality data is expressed in terms of the median time of survival and the number of long- term survivors is indicated separately. Survival times are used to generate Kaplan-
Meier curves. Significance is p < 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment.
Established Disease Model
Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously and grown to the desired size for treatment to begin. Once at the predetermined size range, mice are randomized into treatment groups. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean tumor weights of all groups over days post inoculation are graphed for comparison. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay. Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p value< 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
Orthotopic Disease Models
Mammary Fat Pad Assay
Tumor cells or fragments, of mammary adenocarcinoma origin, are implanted directly into a surgically exposed and reflected mammary fat pad in rodents. The fat pad is placed back in its original position and the surgical site is closed. Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean tumor weights of all groups over days post inoculation are graphed for comparison. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group.
Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay. Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p value< 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
In addition, this model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ, or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
Intraprostatic Assay
Tumor cells or fragments, of prostatic adenocarcinoma origin, are implanted directly into a surgically exposed dorsal lobe of the prostate in rodents. The prostate is externalized through an abdominal incision so that the tumor can be implanted specifically in the dorsal lobe while verifying that the implant does not enter the seminal vesicles. The successfully inoculated prostate is replaced in the abdomen and the incisions through the abdomen and skin are closed. Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected. The size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the lungs), or measuring the target organ weight (i.e., the regional lymph nodes). The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment. Intrabronchial Assay
Tumor cells of pulmonary origin may be implanted intrabronchially by making an incision through the skin and exposing the trachea. The trachea is pierced with the beveled end of a 25 gauge needle and the tumor cells are inoculated into the main bronchus using a flat-ended 27 gauge needle with a 90° bend. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected. The size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the contralateral lung), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
Intracecal Assay
Tumor cells of gastrointestinal origin may be implanted intracecally by making an abdominal incision through the skin and externalizing the intestine. Tumor cells are inoculated into the cecal wall without penetrating the lumen of the intestine using a
27 or 30 gauge needle. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected. The size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t- test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the liver), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
Secondary (Metastatic) Antitumor Efficacy
Spontaneous Metastasis
Tumor cells are inoculated s.c. and the tumors allowed to grow to a predetermined range for spontaneous metastasis studies to the lung or liver. These primary tumors are then excised. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule which may include the period leading up to the excision of the primary tumor to evaluate therapies directed at inhibiting the early stages of tumor metastasis. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined. Survival data is used to generate Kaplan-Meier curves. Significance is p < 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment. The mean number of visible tumor foci, as determined under a dissecting microscope, and the mean target organ weights are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment for both of these endpoints.
Forced Metastasis
Tumor cells are injected into the tail vein, portal vein, or the left ventricle of the heart in experimental (forced) lung, liver, and bone metastasis studies, respectively. Compounds are administered p.o., i.p., i.v., i.m., or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined. Survival data is used to generate Kaplan-Meier curves. Significance is p < 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment. The mean number of visible tumor foci, as determined under a dissecting microscope, and the mean target organ weights are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance at p < 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group in the experiment for both endpoints.
EXAMPLE 19
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation for the treatment of neurological diseases
Pain
Acute pain. Acute pain is measured on a hot plate mainly in rats. Two variants of hot plate testing are used: In the classical variant animals are put on a hot surface (52 to
56°C) and the latency time is measured until the animals show nocifensive behavior, such as stepping or foot licking. The other variant is an increasing temperature hot plate where the experimental animals are put on a surface of neutral temperature. Subsequently this surface is slowly but constantly heated until the animals begin to lick a hind paw. The temperature which is reached when hind paw licking begins is a measure for pain threshold.
Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing. Persistent pain. Persistent pain is measured with the formalin or capsaicin test, mainly in rats. A solution of 1 to 5%> formalin or 10 to 100 μg capsaicin is injected into one hind paw of the experimental animal. After formalin or capsaicin application the animals show nocifensive reactions like flinching, licking and biting of the affected paw. The number of nocifensive reactions within a time frame of up to
90 minutes is a measure for intensity of pain.
Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to formalin or capsaicin administration.
Neuropathic pain. Neuropathic pain is induced by different variants of unilateral sciatic nerve injury mainly in rats. The operation is performed under anesthesia. The first variant of sciatic nerve injury is produced by placing loosely constrictive ligatures around the common sciatic nerve. The second variant is the tight ligation of about the half of the diameter of the common sciatic nerve. In the next variant, a group of models is used in which tight ligations or transections are made of either the L5 and L6 spinal nerves, or the L%> spinal nerve only. The fourth variant involves an axotomy of two of the three terminal branches of the sciatic nerve (tibial and common peroneal nerves) leaving the remaining sural nerve intact whereas the last variant comprises the axotomy of only the tibial branch leaving the sural and common nerves uninjured. Control animals are treated with a sham operation.
Postoperatively, the nerve injured animals develop a chronic mechanical allodynia, cold allodynioa, as well as a thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA; Electronic von Frey System, Somedic Sales AB, Hδrby, Sweden). Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy), or by means of a cold plate of 5 to 10°C where the nocifensive reactions of the affected hind paw are counted as a measure of pain intensity. A further test for cold induced pain is the counting of nocifensive reactions, or duration of nocifensive responses after plantar administration of acetone to the affected hind limb. Chronic pain in general is assessed by registering the circadanian rhythms in activity (Surjo and Arndt, Universitat zu Kδln, Cologne, Germany), and by scoring differences in gait (foot print patterns; FOOTPRINTS program, Klapdor et al., 1997. A low cost method to analyze footprint patterns. J. Neurosci. Methods 75, 49-54).
Compounds are tested against sham operated and vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
Inflammatory Pain. Inflammatory pain is induced mainly in rats by injection of 0.75 mg carrageenan or complete Freund's adjuvant into one hind paw. The animals develop an edema with mechanical allodynia as well as thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA,
USA). Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy, Paw thermal stimulator, G. Ozaki, University of California, USA). For edema measurement two methods are being used. In the first method, the animals are sacrificed and the affected hindpaws sectioned and weighed. The second method comprises differences in paw volume by measuring water displacement in a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy).
Compounds are tested against uninflamed as well as vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
Diabetic neuropathic pain. Rats treated with a single intraperitoneal injection of 50 to 80 mg/kg streptozotocin develop a profound hyperglycemia and mechanical allodynia within 1 to 3 weeks. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science
Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA). Compounds are tested against diabetic and non-diabetic vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
Parkinson's disease
6-Hydroxydopamine (6-OH-DA) Lesion. Degeneration of the dopaminergic ni- grostriatal and striatopallidal pathways is the central pathological event in Parkinson's disease. This disorder has been mimicked experimentally in rats using single/sequential unilateral stereotaxic injections of 6-OH-DA into the medium forebrain bundle (MFB).
Male Wistar rats (Harlan Winkelmann, Germany), weighing 200+250 g at the beginning of the experiment, are used. The rats are maintained in a temperature- and humidity-controlled environment under a 12 h light/dark cycle with free access to food and water when not in experimental sessions. The following in vivo protocols are approved by the governmental authorities. All efforts are made to minimize animal suffering, to reduce the number of animals used, and to utilize alternatives to in vivo techniques.
Animals are administered pargyline on the day of surgery (Sigma, St. Louis, MO, USA; 50 mg/kg i.p.) in order to inhibit metabolism of 6-OHDA by monoamine oxidase and desmethylimipramine HC1 (Sigma; 25 mg/kg i.p.) in order to prevent uptake of 6-OHDA by noradrenergic terminals. Thirty minutes later the rats are anesthetized with sodium pentobarbital (50 mg/kg) and placed in a stereotaxic frame. In order to lesion the DA nigrostriatal pathway 4 μl of 0.01% ascorbic acid-saline containing 8 μg of 6-OHDA HBr (Sigma) are injected into the left medial fore-brain bundle at a rate of 1 μl min (2.4 mm anterior, 1.49 mm lateral, -2.7 mm ventral to Bregma and the skull surface). The needle is left in place an additional 5 min to allow diffusion to occur. Stepping Test. Forelimb akinesia is assessed three weeks following lesion placement using a modified stepping test protocol. In brief, the animals are held by the experimenter with one hand fixing the hindlimbs and slightly raising the hind part above the surface. One paw is touching the table, and is then moved slowly sideways (5 s for 1 m), first in the forehand and then in the backhand direction. The number of adjusting steps is counted for both paws in the backhand and forehand direction of movement. The sequence of testing is right paw forehand and backhand adjusting stepping, followed by left paw forehand and backhand directions. The test is repeated three times on three consecutive days, after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing. Forehand adjusted stepping reveals no consistent differences between lesioned and healthy control animals. Analysis is therefore restricted to backhand adjusted stepping.
Balance Test. Balance adjustments following postural challenge are also measured during the stepping test sessions. The rats are held in the same position as described in the stepping test and, instead of being moved sideways, tilted by the experimenter towards the side of the paw touching the table. This maneuver results in loss of balance and the ability of the rats to regain balance by forelimb movements is scored on a scale ranging from 0 to 3. Score 0 is given for a normal forelimb placement. When the forelimb movement is delayed but recovery of postural balance detected, score 1 is given. Score 2 represents a clear, yet insufficient, forelimb reaction, as evidenced by muscle contraction, but lack of success in recovering balance, and score
3 is given for no reaction of movement. The test is repeated three times a day on each side for three consecutive days after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing.
Staircase Test (Paw Reaching). A modified version of the staircase test is used for evaluation of paw reaching behavior three weeks following primary and secondary lesion placement. Plexiglass test boxes with a central platform and a removable staircase on each side are used. The apparatus is designed such that only the paw on the same side at each staircase can be used, thus providing a measure of independent forelimb use. For each test the animals are left in the test boxes for 15 min. The double staircase is filled with 7 x 3 chow pellets (Precision food pellets, formula: P, purified rodent diet, size 45 mg; Sandown Scientific) on each side. After each test the number of pellets eaten (successfully retrieved pellets) and the number of pellets taken (touched but dropped) for each paw and the success rate (pellets eaten/pellets taken) are counted separately. After three days of food deprivation (12 g per animal per day) the animals are tested for 11 days. Full analysis is conducted only for the last five days.
MPTP treatment. The neuro toxin l-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine (MPTP) causes degeneration of mesencephalic dopaminergic (DAergic) neurons in rodents, non-human primates, and humans and, in so doing, reproduces many of the symptoms of Parkinson's disease. MPTP leads to a marked decrease in the levels of dopamine and its metabolites, and in the number of dopaminergic terminals in the striatum as well as severe loss of the tyrosine hydroxylase (TH)-immunoreactive cell bodies in the substantia nigra, pars compacta.
In order to obtain severe and long-lasting lesions, and to reduce mortality, animals receive single injections of MPTP, and are then tested for severity of lesion 7-10 days later. Successive MPTP injections are administered on days 1, 2 and 3. Animals receive application of 4 mg/kg MPTP hydrochloride (Sigma) in saline once daily. All injections are intraperitoneal (i.p.) and the MPTP stock solution is frozen between injections. Animals are decapitated on day 11.
Immunohistology. At the completion of behavioral experiments, all animals are anaesthetized with 3 ml thiopental (1 g/40 ml i.p., Tyrol Pharma). The mice are perfused transcardially with 0.01 M PBS (pH 7.4) for 2 min, followed by 4% paraformaldehyde (Merck) in PBS for 15 min. The brains are removed and placed in A% paraformaldehyde for 24 h at 4°C. For dehydration they are then transferred to a 20% sucrose (Merck) solution in 0.1 M PBS at 4°C until they sink. The brains are frozen in methylbutan at -20°C for 2 min and stored at -70°C. Using a sledge microtome (mod. 3800-Frigocut, Leica), 25 μm sections are taken from the genu of the coφus callosum (AP 1.7 mm) to the hippocampus (AP 21.8 mm) and from AP 24.16 to AP 26.72. Forty-six sections are cut and stored in assorters in 0.25 M Tris buffer (pH 7.4) for immunohistochemistry.
A series of sections is processed for free-floating tyrosine hydroxylase (TH) immunohistochemistry. Following three rinses in 0.1 M PBS, endogenous peroxidase activity is quenched for 10 min in 0.3% H2O2 ±PBS. After rinsing in PBS, sections are preincubated in 10% normal bovine serum (Sigma) for 5 min as blocking agent and transferred to either primary anti-rat TH rabbit antiserum (dilution 1:2000).
Following overnight incubation at room temperature, sections for TH immuno- reactivity are rinsed in PBS (2 xlO min) and incubated in biotinylated anti-rabbit immunoglobulin G raised in goat (dilution 1 :200) (Vector) for 90 min, rinsed repeatedly and transferred to Vectastain ABC (Vector) solution for 1 h. 3,.3' -Diaminobenzidine tetrahydrochloride (DAB; Sigma) in 0.1 M PBS, supplemented with 0.005%) H2O2 , serves as chromogen in the subsequent visualization reaction. Sections are mounted on to gelatin-coated slides, left to dry overnight, counter-stained with hematoxylin dehydrated in ascending alcohol concentrations and cleared in butylacetate. Coverslips are mounted on entellan.
Rotarod Test. We use a modification of the procedure described by Rozas and Labandeira-Garcia (1997), with a CR-1 Rotamex system (Columbus Instruments, Columbus, OH) comprising an IBM-compatible personal computer, a CIO-24 data acquisition card, a control unit, and a four-lane rotarod unit. The rotarod unit consists of a rotating spindle (diameter 7.3 cm) and individual compartments for each mouse.
The system software allows preprogramming of session protocols with varying rotational speeds (0-80 rpm). Infrared beams are used to detect when a mouse has fallen onto the base grid beneath the rotarod. The system logs the fall as the end of the experiment for that mouse, and the total time on the rotarod, as well as the time of the fall and all the set-up parameters, are recorded. The system also allows a weak current to be passed through the base grid, to aid training. - I l l -
Dementia
The object recognition task. The object recognition task has been designed to assess the effects of experimental manipulations on the cognitive performance of rodents. A rat is placed in an open field, in which two identical objects are present. The rats inspects both objects during the first trial of the object recognition task. In a second trial, after a retention interval of for example 24 hours, one of the two objects used in the first trial, the 'familiar' object, and a novel object are placed in the open field. The inspection time at each of the objects is registered. The basic measures in the OR task is the time spent by a rat exploring the two object the second trial. Good retention is reflected by higher exploration times towards the novel than the 'familiar' object.
Administration of the putative cognition enhancer prior to the first trial predominantly allows assessment of the effects on acquisition, and eventually on consolidation processes. Administration of the testing compound after the first trial allows to assess the effects on consolidation processes, whereas administration before the second trial allows to measure effects on retrieval processes.
The passive avoidance task. The passive avoidance task assesses memory performance in rats and mice. The inhibitory avoidance apparatus consists of a two-compartment box with a light compartment and a dark compartment. The two compartments are separated by a guillotine door that can be operated by the experimenter. A threshold of 2 cm separates the two compartments when the guillotine door is raised. When the door is open, the illumination in the dark compartment is about 2 lux. The light intensity is about 500 lux at the center of the floor of the light compartment.
Two habituation sessions, one shock session, and a retention session are given, separated by inter-session intervals of 24 hours. In the habituation sessions and the retention session the rat is allowed to explore the apparatus for 300 sec. The rat is placed in the light compartment, facing the wall opposite to the guillotine door. After an accommodation period of 15 sec. the guillotine door is opened so that all parts of the apparatus can be visited freely. Rats normally avoid brightly lit areas and will enter the dark compartment within a few seconds.
In the shock session the guillotine door between the compartments is lowered as soon as the rat has entered the dark compartment with its four paws, and a scrambled 1 mA footshock is administered for 2 sec. The rat is removed from the apparatus and put back into its home cage. The procedure during the retention session is identical to that of the habituation sessions.
The step-through latency, that is the first latency of entering the dark compartment (in sec.) during the retention session is an index of the memory performance of the animal; the longer the latency to enter the dark compartment, the better the retention is. A testing compound in given half an hour before the shock session, together with 1 mg*kg_1 scopolamine. Scopolamine impairs the memory performance during the retention session 24 hours later. If the test compound increases the enter latency compared with the scopolamine-treated controls, is likely to possess cognition enhancing potential.
The Morris water escape task. The Morris water escape task measures spatial orientation learning in rodents. It is a test system that has extensively been used to investigate the effects of putative therapeutic on the cognitive functions of rats and mice. The performance of an animal is assessed in a circular water tank with an escape platform that is submerged about 1 cm below the surface of the water. The escape platform is not visible for an animal swimming in the water tank. Abundant extra-maze cues are provided by the furniture in the room, including desks, computer equipment, a second water tank, the presence of the experimenter, and by a radio on a shelf that is playing softly.
The animals receive four trials during five daily acquisition sessions. A trial is started by placing an animal into the pool, facing the wall of the tank. Each of four starting positions in the quadrants north, east, south, and west is used once in a series of four trials; their order is randomized. The escape platform is always in the same position. A trial is terminated as soon as the animal had climbs onto the escape platform or when 90 seconds have elapsed, whichever event occurs first. The animal is allowed to stay on the platform for 30 seconds. Then it is taken from the platform and the next trial is started. If an animal did not find the platform within 90 seconds it is put on the platform by the experimenter and is allowed to stay there for 30 seconds. After the fourth trial of the fifth daily session, an additional trial is given as a probe trial: the platform is removed, and the time the animal spends in the four quadrants is measured for 30 or 60 seconds. In the probe trial, all animals start from the same start position, opposite to the quadrant where the escape platform had been positioned during acquisition.
Four different measures are taken to evaluate the performance of an animal during acquisition training: escape latency, traveled distance, distance to platform, and swimming speed. The following measures are evaluated for the probe trial: time (s) in quadrants and traveled distance (cm) in the four quadrants. The probe trial provides additional information about how well an animal learned the position of the escape platform. If an animal spends more time and swims a longer distance in the quadrant where the platform had been positioned during the acquisition sessions than in any other quadrant, one concludes that the platform position has been learned well.
In order to assess the effects of putative cognition enhancing compounds, rats or mice with specific brain lesions which impair cognitive functions, or animals treated with compounds such as scopolamine or MK-801, which interfere with normal learning, or aged animals which suffer from cognitive deficits, are used.
The T-maze spontaneous alternation task. The T-maze spontaneous alternation task (TeMCAT) assesses the spatial memory performance in mice. The start arm and the two goal arms of the T-maze are provided with guillotine doors which can be operated manually by the experimenter. A mouse is put into the start arm at the beginning of training. The guillotine door is closed. In the first trial, the 'forced trial', either the left or right goal arm is blocked by lowering the guillotine door. After the mouse has been released from the start arm, it will negotiate the maze, eventually enter the open goal arm, and return to the start position, where it will be confined for 5 seconds, by lowering the guillotine door. Then, the animal can choose freely between the left and right goal arm (all guillotine-doors opened) during 14 'free choice' trials. As soon a the mouse has entered one goal arm, the other one is closed.
The mouse eventually returns to the start arm and is free to visit whichever go alarm it wants after having been confined to the start arm for 5 seconds. After completion of 14 free choice trials in one session, the animal is removed from the maze. During training, the animal is never handled.
The percent alternations out of 14 trials is calculated. This percentage and the total time needed to complete the first forced trial and the subsequent 14 free choice trials (in s) is analyzed. Cognitive deficits are usually induced by an injection of scopolamine, 30 min before the start of the training session. Scopolamine reduced the per-cent alternations to chance level, or below. A cognition enhancer, which is always administered before the training session, will at least partially, antagonize the scopolamine-induced reduction in the spontaneous alternation rate.
EXAMPLE 20
Identification of test compound efficacy in an animal model of COPD
A J mice are exposed to the smoke from 2 unfiltered cigarettes per day for 6 days per week for 14 weeks. Non-smoking, age-matched animals are used as controls. Animals are orally dosed with test compound or vehicle 1 hour before and 7 hours after smoke exposure. This twice-daily dosing regime is continued throughout the smoke exposure period. On day 7 of the weekly exposure, animals are given only 1 dose of test compound and are not exposed to cigarette smoke.
After the smoke exposure period, the mice are killed, their lungs inflated with phosphate-buffered formalin via their trachea, and then the lungs and heart are removed en bloc and fixed at 4°C for 48 hours. The lungs are then prepared for paraffin wax sectioning, and 4 mm sections are cut and mounted on glass slides. Sections are then stained with haematoxylin and eosin. Moφhometric analysis of lung sections is done by calculation of the Linear Mean Intercept (LMI) parameter using a semi-automated computer image analysis system. Each slide (1 per mouse) contains several sections originating from multiple lobes. Twelve non-overlapping areas (each area covering 1.53 x 10-3 cm ) are randomly selected for LMI analysis. The 12 areas cover a minimum of two lobes per slide. Non-parenchymal components (airways, blood vessels) are excluded from the analysis to prevent artifactual error. The mean intercept length is calculated for each mouse. Development of emphysema is seen as an increase in LMI.
LMI data are expressed as the median and statistical comparisons are done using the non-parametric Mann-Witney U-test. A 'p' value of <=0.05 is considered to be statistically significant. The potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparison of the tobacco smoke induced increase in LMI in animals dosed with either the test compound or just the vehicle used for administration of the compound.
EXAMPLE 21
Identification of test compound efficacy in an in vitro functional test relevant to
COPD
The potency of test compounds is evaluated by measuring the inhibition of elastolysis induced by human alveolar macrophages. The cells are isolated from bronchoalveolar lavage samples taken from non-smokers, disease-free smokers, and smokers with COPD. Macrophage suspensions are added to test wells coated with tritiated elastin and incubated at 37°C for 3h to allow adherence of the cells. The wells are then carefully washed to remove non-adherent cells and fresh medium is added to each well. The cells are incubated at 37°C for up to 72 hours in the presence or absence of test compound. Every 24 hours the medium in each well is removed for analysis and replaced by fresh medium. Radioactivity released into the medium is measured by liquid scintillation counting and the rate of elastin degradation is calculated. The potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparing the rate of elastolysis measured with cells incubated in the presence or absence of the compound.
Guinea pigs are exposed on a single occasion to tobacco smoke for 50 minutes.
Animals are sacrificed between 10 minutes and 24 hour following the end of the exposure and their lungs placed in RNAlater™. The lung tissue is homogenised ,and total RNA was extracted using a Qiagen RNeasy™ Maxi kit. Molecular Probes RiboGreen™ RNA quantitation method is used to quantify the amount of RNA in each sample.
Total RNA is reverse transcribed, and the resultant cDNA is used in a real-time polymerase chain reaction (PCR). The cDNA is added to a solution containing the sense and anti-sense primers and the 6-carboxy-tetramethyl-rhodamine labeled probe of the serine/threonine kinase gene. Cyclophilin is used as the housekeeping gene.
The expression of the serine/threonine kinase gene is measured using the TaqMan real-time PCR system that generates an amplification curve for each sample. From this curve a threshold cycle value is calculated: the fractional cycle number at which the amount of amplified target reaches a fixed threshold. A sample containing many copies of the serine/threonine kinase gene will reach this threshold earlier than a sample containing fewer copies. The threshold is set at 0.2, and the threshold cycle Cj is calculated from the amplification curve. The Cj value for the serine/threonine kinase gene is normalized using the O value for the housekeeping gene.
Expression of the serine/threonine kinase gene is increased by at least 3 -fold between
10 minutes and 3 hours post tobacco smoke exposure compared to air exposed control animals.
Test compounds are evaluated as follows. Animals are pre-treated with a test compound between 5 minutes and 1 hour prior to the tobacco smoke exposure and they are then sacrificed up to 3 hours after the tobacco smoke exposure has been completed. Control animals are pre-treated with the vehicle of the test compound via the route of administration chosen for the test compound. A test compound that reduces the tobacco smoke induced upregulation of serine/threonine kinase gene relative to the expression seen in vehicle treated tobacco smoke exposed animals is identified as an inhibitor of serine/threonine kinase gene expression.
EXAMPLE 22
In vivo testins of compounds/target validation for the treatment ofurolosic diseases:
Bladder outlet obstruction model
Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized intraperitoneally with ketamine. The abdomen is opened through a midline incision and the bladder and the proximal urethra are exposed. A constant degree of urethral obstruction is produced by tying a ligature around the urethra and a catheter with an outer diameter of 1 mm.
The abdominal well is closed and the animals allowed to recover.
After 6 weeks, the rats are anesthetized with ketamine, and the ligature around the urethra is carefully removed to normalize the outlet resistance and enable repetitive micturition. A polyethylene catheter is implanted in the bladder through the dome, and exteriorized at the scapular level. Animals are then allowed to recover for at least 48 hours.
Cytometric investigation is performed without anesthesia two days after bladder catheter implantation in control and obstructed animals. The bladder catheter was connected via a T-tube to a strain gauge and a microinjection pump. The conscious rats are held under partial restraint in a restraining device. Warmed saline is infused into the bladder at a rate of 3 ml/hr for control and obstructed animals. The rate of infusion is increased from 3 to 10 ml/hr to obtain similar interval times between micturitions in obstructed and control rats. Overactivity of the obstructed bladders is assessed by measuring the cystometric parameters such as basal pressure, peak micturition pressure, threshold pressure, micturition interval, amplitude and frequency of spontaneous activity and micturition slope. Lluel et al, J. Urol. 160, 2253-57, 1998.
A test compound is dissolved in an appropriate vehicle, such as a mixture of ethanol, Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.), and saline (1:1:8, v/v/v), is administered intravenously through the catheter.
EXAMPLE 23
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation for the treatment of urologic diseases
Measurement of the relaxation effects on the rat prostate contraction
Organ bath assay for measuring agonist-induced contraction of prostate
An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of prostate for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates). Male Wistar rats (200~250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole prostate is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl2, 1.2 mM NaH2PO4, 2 mM CaCl2, 2.5 mM NaHCO , 12 mM glucose). Ventricle prostate lobes were dissected into several strips depending on the size of prostate. Prostate strips are equilibrated for 60 min in organ bath chambers before any stimulation.
Isometric tension is recorded under an appropriate load. Contractile response to adrenergic agonists or electric field stimulation is determined several times until reproducible responses are obtained. Test compounds are pre-incubated prior to the agonistic or electric stimulation. The ratio of each contraction to the negative control is calculated and the effect of the test compounds on the prostate contraction is evaluated. EXAMPLE 24
In vivo testing of compounds/tar set validation for the treatment of urologic diseases
Evaluation of test compounds for micturition disorders
Micturition parameters from cystometry are utilized to evaluate the drug candidates for micturition disorders. Sprague-Dawley rats are anesthetized by intraperitoneal administration of urethane at 1.2 g/kg. The abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter is implanted into the bladder through the dome.
In parallel, the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter filled with 2 IU/ml of heparin in saline is inserted into a common iliac artery. The bladder catheter is connected via T-tube to a pressure transducer and a microinjection pump. Saline is infused at room temperature into the bladder at a rate of 2.4 ml/hr. Intravesicular pressure is recorded continuously on a chart pen recorder. At least three reproducible micturition cycles are recorded before a test compound administration and used as baseline values. The saline infusion is stopped before administrating compounds. A test compound dissolved in an appropriate vehicle is intraarterially injected 2 min before another intraarterial administration of stimulant such as capsaicin. Relative increases in the induced intravesicular pressure are analyzed from the cystometry data in comparison with the normal micturition patterns. The test compounds-mediated inhibition of the increased bladder pressures is evaluated using Student's t-test. A probability level less than 5%> is accepted as significant difference.
EXAMPLE 25
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation for the treatment of urologic diseases
Measurement of the relaxation effects on the rat bladder contraction
Organ bath assay for measuring agonist-induced contraction of urinary bladder
An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of urinary bladder for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates). Male Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole urinary bladder is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl2, 1.2 mM NaH2PO4, 2 mM CaCl2, 2.5 mM NaHCO3, 12 mM glucose).
Isometric tension is recorded under an appropriate load using longitudinal strips of rat detrusor muscle. Bladder strips are equilibrated for 60 minutes before each stimulation. Contractile response to 80 mM KC1 is determined at 15 minute intervals until reproducible responses are obtained. The response to KC1 is used as an internal standard to evaluate the effect of test compounds.
The effects of test compounds are investigated by incubating the strips with compounds for 30 minutes prior to stimulation with an appropriate agonist or electrical stimulation. One of the preparations made from the same animal serves as a control, while others are used for evaluating test compounds. The ratio of each contraction to the internal standard (e.g., a KCl-induced contraction) is calculated, and the effects of the test compounds on the contraction are evaluated. EXAMPLE 26
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation for the treatment of urologic diseases
Measurement of bladder cystometry in anesthetized rats
(1) Animals. Female Sprague-Dawley rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are used.
(2) Catheter implantation. Rats are anesthetized by intraperitoneal administration of urethane (Sigma) at 1.25 g/kg. The abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) is implanted into the bladder through the dome. In parallel, the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) filled with saline (Otsuka) is inserted into a femoral vein.
(3) Investigation of bladder contraction. The bladder is filled via the catheter by incremental volume of saline until spontaneous bladder contractions occur. The intravesicular pressure is measured a pressure transducer and displayed continuously on a chart recorder. The activity of test compounds is assessed after intravenous administration through a polyethylene cannula inserted into the femoral vein.
Measurement of bladder cystometry in conscious rats
(1) Animals. Female Sprague-Dawley rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are used.
(2) Catheter implantation. Rats are anesthetized by intramuscular administration of ketamine (75 mg/kg) and xylazine (15 mg/kg). The abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON
DICKINSON, PE50) is implanted into the bladder through the dome. The catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle (14G) to neck. In parallel, the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) filled with saline (Otsuka) is inserted into a femoral vein. The catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle to neck.
(3) Cystometric investigation. The bladder catheter is connected via T-tube to a pressure transducer (Viggo-Spectramed Pte Ltd, DT-XXAD) and a micro- injection pump (TERUMO). Saline is infused at room temperature into the bladder at a rate of 10 ml/hr. Intravesicular pressure is recorded continuously on a chart pen recorder (Yokogawa). At least three reproducible micturition cycles are recorded before a test compound administration.
(4) Administration of test compounds. A test compound dissolved in the mixture of ethanol, Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.) and saline (1 : 1 : 8, v/v/v) is administered intravenously through the catheter.
EXAMPLE 27
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation for the treatment of inflammatory disorders
Mouse anti-CD3 induced cytokine production model
BALB/c mice are injected with a single intravenous injection of 10 μg of 145-2C11
(purified hamster anti-mouse CD3ε monoclonal antibodies, PHARMINGEN). A test compound is administered intraperitoneally 60 min prior to the anti-CD3 mAb injection. Blood is collected 90 minutes after the antibody injection. Serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 φm. for 10 min. IL-2 and IL-4 levels in the serum are determined by an ELISA. Mouse anti-IgD induced IgE production model
BALB/c mice are injected intravenously with 0.8 mg of purified goat anti-mouse IgD antibody or PBS (defined as day 0). Compound is administered intraperitoneally from day 0 to day 6. On day 7 blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 φm. for 10 min. Serum total levels of IgE are determined by YAMASA's ELISA kit and their Ig subtypes are done by an Ig ELISA KIT (Rougier Biotech's, Montreal, Canada).
Mouse LPS-induced TNF-α production model
BALB/c mice are injected intraperitoneally with LPS (200 μg/mouse). Compound is administered intraperitoneally 1 h before the LPS injection. Blood is collected at 90 min post-LPS injection and plasma is obtained. TNF-α concentration in the sample is determined using an ELISA kit.
Mouse eotaxin-induced eosinophilia model
BALB/c mice are injected intradermally with a 2.5 ml of air on days -6 and -3 to prepare aiφouch. On day 0 compound is administered intraperitoneally 60 min before eotaxin injection (3 μg/mouse, i.d.). IL-5 (300 ng/mouse) is injected intravenously 30 min before the eotaxin injection. After 4 h of the eotaxin injection leukocytes in exudate is collected and the number of total cells is counted. The differential cell counts in the exudate are performed by staining with May-Grunwald Gimsa solution.
Mouse DIP cell transfer model
D10.G4.1 cells (1 x 10 cells/mouse) containing 2 mg of conalbumin in saline is administered i.v. to AKR mice. After 6 h blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for lOmin. IL-4 and IL-5 level in serum are determined by ELISA kits. Compound is administered intraperitoneally at -A and +1 h after these cells injection.
Passive cutaneous anaphylaxis (PCA) test in rats
6 Weeks old male Wistar rats are sensitized intradermally (i.d.) on their shaved backs with 50 μl of 0.1 μg/ml mouse anti-DNP IgE monoclonal antibody (SPE-7) under a light anesthesia. After 24 hours, the rats are challenged intravenously with 1 ml of saline containing 0.6 mg DNP-BSA (30) (LSL CO., LTD) and 0.005 g of Evans blue. Compounds are injected intraperitoneally (i.p.) 0.5 h prior to antigen injection. Rats without the sensitization, challenge, and compound treatment are used for a blank (control) and rats with sensitization, challenge and vehicle treatment are used to determine a value without inhibition. Thirty min after the challenge, the rats are killed, and the skin of the back is removed. Evans blue dye in the skin is extracted in formamide overnight at 63°C. Then an absorbance at 620 nm is measured to obtain the optical density of the leaked dye.
Percent inhibition of PCA with a compound is calculated as follows: % inhibition = {(mean vehicle value - sample value)/(mean vehicle value - mean control value)} x 100
Anaphylactic bronchoconstriction in rats
6 Weeks old male Wistar rats are sensitized intravenously (i.v.) with 10 μg mouse anti-DNP IgE, SPE-7, and 1 days later, the rats are challenged intravenously with
0.3 ml of saline containing 1.5 mg DNP-BSA (30) under anesthesia with urethane (1000 mg/kg, i.p.) and gallamine (50 mg/kg, i.v.). The trachea is cannulated for artificial respiration (2 ml / stroke, 70 strokes / min). Pulmonary inflation pressure (PIP) is recorded through a side-arm of cannula connected to pressure transducer. Change in PIP reflects change of both resistance and compliance of the lungs. To evaluate the drugs, each drug is given i.v. 5 min before challenge. EXAMPLE 28
In vivo target validation for the treatment of atherosclerosis
Effects on plasma cholesterol levels including HDL cholesterol are typically assessed in humanized apo-AI transgenic mice. Modulation of human target proteins can be determined in corresponding transgenic mice (e.g., CETP transgenic mice). Triglyceride-lowering is usually evaluated in ob/ob mice or Zucker rats. Animals are fed with normal diets or modified diets (e.g., enriched by 0.5% cholesterol 20%> coconut oil). Standard protocols consist of oral applications once daily for 7 to 10 days at doses ranging from 0,1 to 100 mg/kg. The compounds are dissolved (e.g., in Solutol/Ethanol/saline mixtures) and applied by oral gavage or intravenous injection. Before and at the end of the application period, blood samples are typically drawn by retroorbital punctuation. Plasma cholesterol and triglyceride levels are determined with standardized clinical diagnostic kits (e.g., INFINITY™ cholesterol reagent and
ΓNFΓNITY™ triglyceride reagent; Sigma, St. Louis). HDL cholesterol is determined after phosphotungstic acid precipitation of non-HDL lipoproteins or FPLC gel filtration with post-column derivatization of cholesterol using the reagents mentioned above. Plasma levels of human apolipoprotein-AI in relevant humanized transgenic mice are measured by immunoturbidimetry (Sigma).
Long-term anti-atherosclerotic potency of drug candidates are evaluated in Apo E- knockout mice. Therefore, animals are fed a standard chow diet (4.5%» fat) or a Western diet (20% fat) containing 1 to 100 mg/kg of the respective compounds for 3 to 5 month. Arterial lesions are quantified in serial cryosections of the proximal aorta by staining with Oil Red O and counterstaining with hematoxylin. Lesion area size is determined using a digital imaging system. EXAMPLE 29
In vivo testing of cardiovascular effects of test compounds
Hemodynamics in anesthetized rats
Male Wistar rats weighing 300-350 g (Harlan Winkelmann, Borchen, Germany) are anesthetized with thiopental "Nycomed" (Nycomed, Munich, Germany) 100 mg kg"1 i.p. A tracheotomy is performed, and catheters are inserted into the femoral artery for blood pressure and heart rate measurements (Gould pressure transducer and recorder, model RS 3400) and into the femoral vein for substance administration. The animals are ventilated with room air and their body temperature is controlled. Test compounds are administered orally or intravenously.
Hemodynamics in conscious SHR
Female conscious SHR (Moellegaard/Denmark, 220 - 290 g) are equipped with implantable radiotelemetry, and a data aquisition system (Data Sciences, St. Paul, MN, USA), comprising a chronically implantable transducer/transmitter unit equipped with a fluid-filled catheter is used. The transmitter is implanted into the peritoneal cavity, and the sensing catheter is inserted into the descending aorta.
Single administration of test compounds is performed as a solution in Transcutol®/ Cremophor®/ H2O (10/20/70 = v/v/v) given orally by gavage. The animals of control groups only receive the vehicle. Before treatment, mean blood pressure and heart rate of treated and untreated control groups are measured.
Hemodynamics in anesthetized dogs
Studies are performed on anesthetized dogs of either sex (body weight between 20-
30 kg). Anesthesia is initiated by slow intravenous injection of 25 mg kg"1 sodium thiopental (Trapanal®, Byk Gulden, Konstanz, Germany). The anesthesia is continued and maintained throughout the experiment by continuous infusion of 0.04 mg kg"1 h"1 fentanyl (Fentanyl®, Janssen, Neuss, Germany) and 0.25 mg kg"1 h"1 droperidol (DihydrobenzperidolR, Janssen, Neuss, Germany). During this anaesthesia, heart rate is as low as 35-40 bpm due to increased vagal tone. Therefore, a parasympathetic blockade is achieved by intermittent injections of atropine (0.1 mg per animal) (AtropinsulfatR, Eifelfango, Bad Neuenahr, Germany). After intubation the animals are artificially ventilated at constant volume (EngstromR 300, Engstrδm, Sweden) with room air enriched with 30%> oxygen to maintain an end-tidal CO2 concentration of about 5%> (NormocapR, Datex, Finland).
The following catheters are implanted for measurement of cardiovascular parameters: a tip catheter for recording of left ventricular pressure is inserted into the ventricle via the carotid artery (PC350, Millar Instruments, Houston, TX, USA), a hollow catheter is inserted into the femoral artery and connected to a strain gauge (type 4-327-1, Telos Medical, Upland, CA, USA for recording of arterial blood pressure, two venous catheters are inserted into either femoral vein and one additional catheter into a forearm vein for application of the anesthetic and drugs, respectively, and an oxymetry catheter for recording of oxygen saturation is inserted into the coronary sinus via the jugular vein (Schwarzer IVH4, Mϋnchen, Germany).
After a left-sided thoracotomy the ramus circumflexus of the left coronary artery (LCX) is freed from connective tissue, and an electromagnetic flow probe (Gould Statham, Oxnard, CA, USA) is applied for measurement of coronary blood flow. Arterial blood pressure, electrocardiogram (lead II), left ventricular pressure, first derivative of left ventricular pressure (dP/dt), heart rate, coronary blood flow, and oxygen saturation in the coronary sinus are continuously recorded on a pen recorder (Brush, Gould, Cleveland, OH, USA). The maximum of dP/dt is used as measure of left ventricular contractility (dP/dtmax). After completion of the instrumentation, an interval of 60 min is allowed for stabilization before the test compound is intravenously applied as bolus injections. Care is taken that all measured cardiovascular parameters have returned to control level before injection of the next dose. Each dose of the test compound is tested at least three times in different animals. The order of injection of the different doses is randomized in each animal.
EXAMPLE 30
In vitro testing of compounds/target validation for hematological diseases
Isolation of CD34+ cells
Mononuclear cells from fresh blood (cord blood, peripheral blood, bone marrow) were separated by Ficoll Paque® (1.077 density, Amersham-Pharmacia) density gradient centrifugation, and CD34+ cells were purified by immunomagnetic separation system (MiniMACS, Miltenyi Biotec), according to the manufacture's instructions (Direct CD34 Progenitor Cell Isolation Kit, Miltenyi Biotec). The percentage of CD34+ cells were generally from 90-95%.
Erythropoiesis/Anemia
Erythroid CD34+ Liquid Culture
1-2 x 104 CD34+ cells were plated in triplicate in 24-well plates with 1ml Iscoves modified Dulbecco medium (IMDM) (Invitrogen) containing 10%> fetal bovine serum (FCS, Invitrogen), 1% Glutamine (Invitrogen) supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml) (PeproTech), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) (Erypo® FS 4000, Cilag) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1-
0.2% DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2. After 9 to 14 days cells were harvested, counted and stained with phycoerythrin (PE)-conjugated mAb against Glycophorin A (Pharmingen) to analyze differentiation. Erythroid Colony-forming assay
Five hundred CD34+ cells/ml were plated in triplicate 24-well plates with 1%> methylcellulose in IMDM containing 30%> FCS, 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA), 2mM L-glutamine and 10-4 M 2-mercaptoethanol (Methocult H4230, Cell
Systems®), IL-3 (10 ng/ml) (PeproTech) with different concentration of erythro- poietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO2. After 9 to 14 days erythroid burst forming units (BFU-E) were counted from each of the plates. Afterwards cells were dissolved from methylcellulose with 0.1 % NaCl solution.
Cells were counted and stained with phycoerythrin (PE)-conjugated mAb against Glycophorin A (Pharmingen) to analyze differentiation.
BFU-E culture
1 x 105 Cord Blood CD34+ cells/ml were cultured in IMDM containing 15% BIT- 9500 (Cell Systems®), supplemented with IL-3 (10 ng/ml), IL-6 (10 ng/ml) and SCF (25ng/ml) (PeproTech) and incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2. 3 and 5 days after initiation of culture an equal volume of fresh medium supplemented with 2 X cytokines were added. On day 6 to 7 l-2xl04 erythroid progenitors were plated in triplicate in 24-well plates with 1 ml IMDM containing 10% FCS, 1% glutamine supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml), different concentration of erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1-0.2%) DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO2. After 6 to 8 days cells were harvested and counted to analyze proliferation.
CD36+ cells
1 x 105 Cord Blood CD34+ cells/ml were cultured in IMDM containing 15% BIT-
9500 supplemented with IL-3 (10 ng/ml), IL-6 (10 ng/ml) and SCF (25 ng/ml) and incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2. 3 and 5 days after initiation of culture an equal volume of fresh medium supplemented with 2 X cytokines were added. On day 6 to 7 cells were stained with PE-conjugated mAb against CD36 (Pharmingen) and CD36+ cells were purified using anti-PE microbeads and Mini MACS system (Miltenyi Biotec) according to the manufacture's instructions. l-2xl04 CD36+ cells were plated in triplicate 24well plates with 1ml
IMDM containing 10%> FCS, 1% Glutamine supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1-0.2%) DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO2. After 6 to 8 days cells were harvested and counted to analyze proliferation.
Myelopoiesis and Thrombocytopoiesis
Myeloid CD34+ Liquid Culture
5 x 103 CD34+ cells isolated from peripheral blood, cord blood or from bone marrow were pre-incubated in quadruplicate in 24-well plates in 1ml medium (StemSpan) with 15% FCS, SCF (20 ng/ml) and GM-CSF (2,5 ng/ml) for 6 to 7 days at 37°C and 5.5%) CO2. Then compounds (0.1.1 or 10 μM in DMSO) with or without G-CSF
(0.25 ng/ml; Neupogen®) were added and incubated for another 6 to 7 days. The number of the early myelopoietic CD15+/CDllb" cells and the number of the late myelopoietic CD15+/CDl lb+ cells were determined by cell count (proliferation) and FACS (fluorescent associated cell sorting) analysis (differentiation) at day 13-14.
Megakaryoid CD34 Liquid Culture
5 x 103 CD34+ cells isolated from peripheral blood, cord blood or from bone marrow were incubated in quadruplicate 24-well plates in 1 ml serum-free medium with 2% BSA, SCF (20 ng/ml) and compounds ( 0.1,1 or 10 μM in DMSO) with or without
TPO (0-10 ng/ml) for 12 to 13 days at 37°C and 5% CO2. The number of the megakaryoid CD41+ cells (scatter profile) were determined by FACS analysis. Megakaryocytes will be examined by microscope if necessary.
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Erythropoiesis/ Anemia
Compounds which have demonstrated effects on the drug target in vitro have been administered to normal or anemic animals orally or parenterally. In most cases, mice were used for compound testing. In some cases, other species, e.g. rats, hamsters or guinea pigs have been used in addition. Usually, repeated dosage is required for detection of changes in peripheral blood parameters. During the dosage period and up to five days after the last administration blood samples were drawn for analysis of red and white blood cell counts as well as platelet counts using an automated blood analyzer. In addition, erythropoiesis was assessed by manual hematocrit and reticulocyte count determination. For specific analysis of leukocyte differentiation fluorescent associated cell sorting (FACS) was used.
Myelopoiesis and Thrombocytopoiesis
Myelopoiesis
Immunocompetent Balb/c mice were treated with compounds at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to 4 days. The WBC (white blood cells count) and the neutrophil count were monitored by FACS (CD1 lb+ ; scatter properties).
Immunocompromised Balb/c were generated by intravenous treatment with 5-FU (100 mg/kg i.p). 24 hours later the mice were treated with the test compound at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to 7 to 13 days. Peripheral blood counts (WBC, RBC, PLT) have been determined after retroorbital plexus puncture at days 5,7,11 and 14. For more detailed investigations the development of cellularity of femural bone marrow and spleen were investigated by FACS analysis. The expression of specific differentiation markers on stem and progenitor cells (e.g. CD34, CD33, CD38, CDl lb) and scatter properties were investigated.
Thrombocytopoiesis
Thrombopoietic compounds at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) were administered orally or parenterally following chemotherapy (Carboplatin, 100 mg/kg i.p) immunocompromised mice. After repeated administration (once/day or bid for five to seven days) peripheral blood platelets (automated blood analyzer) have been determined after retroorbital plexus punction at day 5, 7, 11, and 14.
REFERENCES
1. Molecular cloning and expression of a pituitary-specific receptor for growth hormone-releasing hormone. Mol Endocrinol 1992 Oct;6(10):1734-44
2. Molecular cloning and expression of a human anterior pituitary receptor for growth hormone-releasing hormone. Mol Endocrinol 1993 Jan;7(l):77-84

Claims

1. An isolated polynucleotide being selected from the group consisting of:
a) a polynucleotide encoding a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected form the group consisting of: i. amino acid sequences which are at least about 98% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and ii. the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
b) a polynucleotide comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or 3;
c) a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent conditions to a polynucleotide specified in (a) and (b) and encodes a growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide;
d) a polynucleotide the sequence of which deviates from the polynucleotide sequences specified in (a) to (c) due to the degeneration of the genetic code and encodes a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide; and
e) a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d) and encodes a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide.
2. An expression vector containing any polynucleotide of claim 1.
3. A host cell containing the expression vector of claim 2.
4. A substantially purified growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide of claim 1.
5. A method for producing a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide, wherein the method comprises the following steps: a) culturing the host cell of claim 3 under conditions suitable for the expression of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide; and b) recovering the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide from the host cell culture.
6. A method for detection of a polynucleotide encoding a growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide in a biological sample comprising the following steps: a) hybridizing any polynucleotide of claim 1 to a nucleic acid material of a biological sample, thereby forming a hybridization complex; and b) detecting said hybridization complex.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein before hybridization, the nucleic acid material of the biological sample is amplified.
8. A method for the detection of a polynucleotide of claim 1 or a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide of claim 4 comprising the steps of: a) contacting a biological sample with a reagent which specifically interacts with the polynucleotide or the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide and b) detecting the interaction.
9. A diagnostic kit for conducting the method of any one of claims 6 to 8.
10. A method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the steps of: a) contacting a test compound with any growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of claim 1; b) detecting binding of the test compound to the growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of a growth hormone- releasing hormone receptor (GPCR).
11. A method of screening for agents which regulate the activity of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the steps of: a) contacting a test compound with a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of claim
1; and b) detecting a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) activity of the polypeptide, wherein a test compound which increases the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) activity is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing the activity of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), and wherein a test compound which decreases the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) activity of the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of the growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR).
12. A method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the steps of: a) contacting a test compound with any polynucleotide of claim 1 ; and b) detecting binding of the test compound to the polynucleotide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR).
13. A method of reducing the activity of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR), comprising the step of contacting a cell with a reagent which specifically binds to any polynucleotide of claim 1 or any growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide of claim 4, whereby the activity of growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) is reduced.
14. A reagent that modulates the activity of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) polypeptide or a polynucleotide wherein said reagent is identified by the method of any of the claim 10 to 12.
15. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising the expression vector of claim 2 or the reagent of claim 14 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
16. Use of the expression vector of claim 2 or the reagent of claim 14 in the preparation of a medicament for modulating the activity of a growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor (GPCR) in a disease.
17. Use of claim 16 wherein the disease is a cardiovascular disorder, gastrointestinal or liver disease, cancer, metabolic disease, inflammatory disease, hematological disorder, neurological disorder, respiratory disease, reproduction disorder or urologic disorder.
PCT/EP2003/006610 2002-06-24 2003-06-24 Regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor WO2004000883A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2003238032A AU2003238032A1 (en) 2002-06-24 2003-06-24 Regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US39044302P 2002-06-24 2002-06-24
US60/390,443 2002-06-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004000883A1 true WO2004000883A1 (en) 2003-12-31

Family

ID=30000556

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2003/006610 WO2004000883A1 (en) 2002-06-24 2003-06-24 Regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor

Country Status (2)

Country Link
AU (1) AU2003238032A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004000883A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005114181A2 (en) * 2004-05-19 2005-12-01 Pfizer Limited Assay method
EP3920961A4 (en) * 2019-02-08 2022-12-14 United States Government as represented by the Department of Veterans Affairs Growth hormone-releasing hormone antagonists and uses thereof

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0591697A2 (en) * 1992-09-15 1994-04-13 Michael Oliver Thorner Cloning and characterization of the growth hormone releasing hormone receptor
WO2001009328A1 (en) * 1999-08-03 2001-02-08 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 15571, a novel gpcr-like molecule of the secretin-like family and uses thereof
WO2001075067A2 (en) * 2000-03-31 2001-10-11 Hyseq, Inc. Novel nucleic acids and polypeptides

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0591697A2 (en) * 1992-09-15 1994-04-13 Michael Oliver Thorner Cloning and characterization of the growth hormone releasing hormone receptor
WO2001009328A1 (en) * 1999-08-03 2001-02-08 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 15571, a novel gpcr-like molecule of the secretin-like family and uses thereof
WO2001075067A2 (en) * 2000-03-31 2001-10-11 Hyseq, Inc. Novel nucleic acids and polypeptides

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
MAYO K E: "MOLECULAR CLONING AND EXPRESSION OF A PITUITARY-SPECIFIC RECEPTOR FOR GROWTH HORMONE-RELEASING HORMONE", MOLECULAR ENDOCRINOLOGY, BALTIMORE, MD, US, vol. 6, no. 10, October 1992 (1992-10-01), pages 1734 - 1744, XP001079536, ISSN: 0888-8809 *
REKASI Z ET AL: "ISOLATION AND SEQUENCING OF CDNAS FOR SPLICE VARIANTS OF GROWTH HORMONE-RELEASING HORMONE RECEPTORS FROM HUMAN CANCERS", PROCEEDINGS OF THE NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES OF USA, NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCE. WASHINGTON, US, vol. 97, no. 19, 12 September 2000 (2000-09-12), pages 10561 - 10566, XP002950120, ISSN: 0027-8424 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005114181A2 (en) * 2004-05-19 2005-12-01 Pfizer Limited Assay method
WO2005114181A3 (en) * 2004-05-19 2006-11-02 Pfizer Ltd Assay method
EP3920961A4 (en) * 2019-02-08 2022-12-14 United States Government as represented by the Department of Veterans Affairs Growth hormone-releasing hormone antagonists and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2003238032A1 (en) 2004-01-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1364026B1 (en) Human g protein-coupled receptor
US20060121562A1 (en) Human receptor tyrosine kinase mertk
US20060052329A1 (en) Regulation of human P2Y1-like G protein-coupled receptor
EP1335978A2 (en) Regulation of human extracellular calcium-sensing g protein-coupled receptor
WO2004000883A1 (en) Regulation of human growth hormone-releasing hormone receptor
WO2004031235A1 (en) Regulation of human calcium-independent alpha-latrotoxin receptor
US20040136981A1 (en) Regulation of human histamine h2-like g protein-coupled receptor
US20050064404A1 (en) Regulation of human serotonin-like g protein-coupled receptor
WO2002099107A2 (en) Regulation of human trace amine receptor ta5
WO2004009803A2 (en) Regulation of human hepsin
WO2003051925A1 (en) Human secretin-type gpcr (latrophilin)
US20030143590A1 (en) Regulation of human dopamine-like g protein- coupled receptor
WO2004020620A1 (en) Regulation of human esterase
US20010041355A1 (en) Regulation of human nerve growth factor-related G protein-coupled receptor
WO2004018516A1 (en) Regulation of human secretin-type gpcr (latrophilin)
WO2004009630A1 (en) Regulation of human serotonin receptor
US20040143092A1 (en) Regulation of human dorsal root receptor-like g protein-coupled receptor
WO2002101043A2 (en) Regulation of human ta4 receptor
WO2004029086A2 (en) Regulation of human calcium-independent alpha-latrotoxin receptor homolog 3
WO2004003189A2 (en) Regulation of human phospholipase c-like protein
WO2003068966A2 (en) REGULATION OF HUMAN Ca2+-PERMEABLE NONSELECTIVE CATION CHANNEL
WO2003004531A2 (en) Regulation of human somatostatin receptor-like protein
US20030166142A1 (en) Regulation of human P2Y - like G protein-coupled receptor
US20060121554A1 (en) Regulation of human RTA-like GPCR
WO2004031234A2 (en) Regulation of human calcium-independent alpha-latrotoxin receptor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: JP